Owner's Manual Saab 9-3 M2006

93U SM 06.
book Page 1 Friday,February 18,2005 1:15 PM
Owner’s Manual
Saab 9-3 M2006
Safety 11
Security 49
9-3 Convertible 63
Instruments and controls 83
Interior equipment 127
Starting and driving 159
Car care 213
Customer Assistance and Information 287
Technical data 293
Index 283
© Saab Automobile AB 2005

Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
Printed in Sweden
93U SM 06.book Page 2 Friday,February 18,2005 1:15 PM
Introduction To find a specific item, use the overviews 3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all
given on page 3–6. A list of content is given cars (can depend on model variant, engine
This manual provides practical guidance on at the beginning of each section of the variant, market specification, options or
driving and caring for your Saab. manual, and there is also a comprehensive accessories).
Although this manual describes the most index at the back of the book. If you have any questions concerning your
important differences between model vari- Supplied with the car is a Warranty and Ser- car, its equipment, the warranty conditions,
ants, it does not specify the equipment or vice Record booklet which contains impor- etc., your Saab dealer will be pleased to
features included on individual models. tant warranty information and specifies the help, or you may call the Saab Customer
Importation and distribution of Saab auto- regular maintenance to be carried out. Also Assistance Center in the U.S. at 1-800-955-
mobiles, spare parts and accessories are included is a Quick Reference Guide, an 9007 or email them at saab-
handled exclusively by Saab Cars USA, Inc. Infotainment System manual, tire warran- crm@saabusa.com. In Canada, please
in the United States and by General Motors ties and (U.S. customers), a dealer directory contact the Saab Customer Assistance
of Canada Limited in Canada. with Roadside Assistance Program infor- Center at 1-800-263-1999.
We recommend that you read through the mation.
manual before taking the car out for the first Enjoy the road ahead!
time and keep it in the car for future refer- WARNING Saab Automobile AB
ence.
Failure to heed warnings may cause
Saab Automobile AB does not accept liability for
personal injury. any damage caused by the fitting of spare parts,
exchange parts or accessories that are not
approved by Saab Automobile AB.
NOTICE
NOTICE texts warns of potential damage
to the car if the recommendations are not
followed.
Since the policy at Saab is one of continual
improvement, we retain the right to incorpo-
rate modifications and to alter specifications
during production without prior notice.
3
Instrument panel Fuel gauge __________________ 91
Odometer and trip meter ________ 89
Speedometer ________________ 89
Tachometer __________________ 88
Temperature gauge____________ 90
Turbo gauge _________________ 90 Clock _______________________ 98
Warning and indicator lights _____ 84 Profiler ______________________ 93
Saab Information Display (SID) ___ 93
Cruise Control ___________ 179
Direction indicators _______ 104
High/low beam control stalk 103
Replacing wiper blades ___ 230

Washers and wipers______ 106
Changing bulbs __________ 232 Washer fluid ____________ 231
Front fog lights___________ 104
Headlight levelling ________ 102
High/low beam __________ 103
Parking lights____________ 102
Rear fog light____________ 104
Automatic climate control __ 115
Car care and maintenance _ 282
Hazard warning lights_____ 105
Manual climate control ____ 110
Seat heating ____________ 114
Seat heating, ACC _______ 123
Ashtray _____________________ 144

Cigarette lighter _______________ 144
Exterior Maximum loads _______________ 294 Hood _______________________ 214

Mounting holes for roof carriers ___ 202 Washing the engine bay_________ 277
Roof load ____________________ 202
Anti-corrosion treatment ___ 280

Body __________________ 279 Changing bulbs _________ 232
Service program _________ 288 Dipswitch ______________ 102
Sunroof ________________ 138 Direction indicators_______ 104
Touching up paintwork ____ 279 Front lights _____________ 234
Washing _______________ 277 Headlight levelling (xenon) _ 102
Waxing and polishing _____ 279 Headlight switches _______ 102
Headlight washers _______ 231
Brake lights _____________ 240

Changing bulbs __________ 232
Light switches ___________ 102 Central locking __________ 50
Taillights _______________ 240 Child safety locks ________ 54
Lock buttons ____________ 50
Trunk lock ______________ 53
Folding down the rear seat _ 146

Lighting ________________ 240
Load-through hatch_______ 148
Spare wheel ____________ 150
Braking _____________________ 180
Tools __________________ 150 Economical motoring _____ 193
Changing wheels______________ 273
Trunk __________________ 146 Fuel filler door __________ 167
Spare wheel _________________ 270
Tire pressure ________________ 306 Fuel gauge _____________ 91
Tires _______________________ 256 Fuel grade _____________ 299
Wheels _____________________ 304 Refueling ______________ 167
Towing_________________ 205 Winter driving ________________ 195
Towing hook eyes ________ 205
Towing a trailer __________ 198
5
Interior Interior rearview mirror _________ 133 Interior lighting: changing bulbs ___ 245
Vanity mirror _________________ 142 Interior light switches ___________ 141
Door mirrors__________________ 132 Sunroof _____________________ 138
Airbag _________________ 32 Airbag_________________ 32

Steering wheel adjustment _ 128 Child safety locks ________ 54
Steering _______________ 302 Child seats _____________ 24
Safety belt care _________ 276
Safety belts ____________ 12
Fuses _________________ 247

Glove box ______________ 144
Storage compartments____ 144
Electric windows _________ 129

Automatic transmission ___ 173
Changing gears _________ 172
Manual transmission _____ 172
Child seats ________________ 24 Ashtray and cigarette lighter _____ 144

Folding down the rear seat ____ 146 Break-In Period _______________ 171
Rear seat__________________ 146 Driving in hot/cold climates ______ 195
Safety belts ________________ 12 Ignition switch ________________ 160
Seat adjustment ____________ 18 Parking brake_________________ 187
Seat heating _______________ 114, Parking _____________________ 187
123 Starting the engine ____________ 162
Upholstery care_____________ 276
Engine bay, 4-cyl Changing engine oil____________ 220 Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 222
Engine: description ____________ 215 Driving in hot climates __________ 197
Engine: technical data __________ 297 Radiator_____________________ 297
Important considerations for driving 164 Temperature gauge ____________ 90
Oil grade and viscosity__________ 298
Color code______________ 307
Engine number __________ 307 ABS brakes_____________ 180
Gearbox number _________ 307 Brake pads _____________ 224
Warning labels __________ 8 Brake system ___________ 303
Vehicle identification number 307 Brake fluid______________ 224
Alternator ______________ 229

Drive belt_______________ 229 Changing a fuse _________ 247
Exhaust emission control __ 165 Fuse table _____________ 252
Ignition system __________ 300 Fuses _________________ 247
Simple troubleshooting Relays ________________ 252
(A/C, ACC) _____________ 282
Spark plugs _____________ 300
Turbo gauge ____________ 90
Topping-up fluid _________ 231
Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 106
Washer fluid ____________ 231
Engine oil: checking level __ 219 Washer jets ____________ 231
Automatic transmission _________ 173 Power steering________________ 225 Battery ______________________ 226
Transmission: technical data _____ 301 Fluid: checking/topping up _______ 225 Battery charge ________________ 226
Manual transmission ___________ 172 Jump starting _________________ 208
7
Engine bay, 2.8 V6 Engine: description _____________ 215 Cooling system, coolant capacity__ 297
Changing engine oil_____________ 220 Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 222
Engine oil: topping up ___________ 219 Driving in hot climates __________ 197
Oil grade and viscosity___________ 298 Temperature gauge ____________ 90
Engine: technical data ___________ 297
Important considerations
Power steering___________ 225 for driving ____________________ 164
Fluid: checking/topping up__ 225 ABS brakes_____________ 181
Brake pads _____________ 303
Brake system ___________ 180
Brake fluid______________ 224
Vehicle identification
number ________________ 307
Colour code _____________ 307
Engine number __________ 307
Warning labels___________ 8 Changing a fuse _________ 249
Gearbox number _________ 307 Fuses _________________ 247
Relays ________________ 252
Fuse table______________ 249
Exhaust emission control __ 165
Drive belt _______________ 229
Simple troubleshooting
(A/C, ACC) _____________ 282 Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 106
Alternator_______________ 229 Topping-up fluid _________ 231
Turbo gauge ____________ 90 Washer jets_____________ 231
Spark plugs _____________ 300 Washer fluid ____________ 231
Ignition system __________ 300
Automatic transmission __________ 173 Engine oil: checking level_________ 219 Battery ______________________ 226
Manual gearbox________________ 172 Battery charge ________________ 226
Gearbox: technical data__________ 301 Jump starting _________________ 208
Warning labels
Radiator fan:
Radiator fan may start at any
time.
A/C system:
Refrigerant at high pressure.
Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fittings before discharging the A/C
system. Improper service methods may cause personal injury. System to be
serviced by qualified personnel only. For instructions consult dealer man-
ual.
The A/C system complies with SAE J639.
Charge: 680 g R134a.
Compressor oil: 150 cc PAG oil SP-10 alt.
Saab oil 4759106
LEVEL INDICATOR
INDICATEUR DE NIVEAU
DARK / NOIR OK
CLEAR LOW
CLAIR BAS
DANGER/POISON 700 CCA (SAE) DANGER/POISON 700 CCA (SAE)

12102-EP
12103-EP
• No sparks, flames or smoking. • Flush eyes immediatly with water • Éviter les étincelles et les flammes. Ne pas fumer. • Rincer immédiatement les yeux avec de
Get medical help fast. l'oau Consulter un médecin rapidement.
• Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause • Protéger les yeux car les gaz explosife peuvent
blindness or injury. • Do not tip battery. Do not open battery causer la cécité ou des blessures. • Ne pas pencher ni ouvrir la batterie.
• Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or severe KEEP OUT OF REACH FROM CHILDREN. • L'acide sulfurique peut causer la cécité ou des GARDER HORS DE LA PORTÉE DES
000
000
burns. brûlures graves. ENFANTS

MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY-P/N 53 52 000 12V/700A/125min(SAE) 12V/700A/70Ah (EN) BATTERIE SANS ENTRETIEN-P/N 53 52 000 12V/700A/125min(SAE) 12V/700A/70Ah (EN)
Saab Automobile AB 53 53 057 Manufactured by Tudor Spain (Exide Technologies) 12102-EP Saab Automobile AB 53 53 085 Fabriquée par Tudor Espagne (Exide Technologies) 12103-EP
Battery:
• No sparks, flames or smoking
• Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause blindness or injury
• Sulphuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns
• Flush eyes immediately with water. Get medical help fast
Coolant:
• Do not tip battery. Do not open battery CANADA
Never open when engine hot!
NETTOYER LE BOUCHON
• NO SPARKS, FLAMES OR SMOKING DE REMPLISSAGE
• SHIELD EYES AVANT DE L’ENLEVER.
• KEEP OUT OF REACH FROM CHILDREN UTILISER SEULEMENT
DU LIQUIDE DOT 4 PROV-
• ACID ENANT D’UN CONTE-
• SEE OWNER’S MANUAL NANT SCELLÉ.
• EXPLOSIVE GAS
9
Jack
• Jack is designed only for changing a tire or mounting
tire snow chains.
• Vehicle must be level and jack must be placed on firm
and level ground.
• Never crawl underneath vehicle when it is jacked up.
JACKING INSTRUCTION
USA 1 Set parking brake and shift transmission to park.
2 Fit top of jack into jacking point next to wheel to be
changed.
3 Crank jack so that vehicle begins to lift.
4 Using socket wrench in tool kit, loosen wheel bolts
one-half turn.
5 Raise vehicle so that tire clears ground. Loosen
wheel bolts completely and remove wheel.
CANADA 6 Mount spare wheel and tighten bolts enough so
wheel is not loose.
7 Lower vehicle. Tighten wheel bolts in a crisscross
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur sequence.
• Children 12 and under can be killed by the airbag
• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in the front
• Sit as far back as possible from the airbag
• ALWAYS use SEAT BELTS and CHILD RESTRAINTS
Contact a Saab dealer if a

xenon headlight requires
replacement. Changing wheels:
This label is only found on Use only on specified vehicle. Safe working load
cars with xenon headlights. 2425 lbs. (1100 kg). Use on level firm ground only. Do
not get under a vehicle that is supported only by a jack,
use vehicle support stands. No persons are to remain in
the vehicle.
10
Example of symbols that can be found in your car
No sparks,
Windshield Coolant tem-
flames or Buckle up Headlights Radiator fan
smoking wipers perature
Refer to
the Owner’s Airbag Direction Windshield No charge to
Fuel
Manual indicators washers battery
Never place a
rear-facing
Shield eyes child seat in Parking lights Defroster Foot brake
this seat
Keep out of
reach of Electric Hazard warn- Rear window
windows Coolant level
ing lights heating
children
Battery acid Deactivating

Engine oil
contains sul- of rear window Front fog lights Cabin fan
phuric acid switches pressure
Risk of Central
explosive gas locking, lock Rear fog light ABS brakes
Central Electronic
locking, Stability
unlock Program
Trunk lid,
opening
Safety 11
Safety
Safety belts ___________ 12

Seats ________________ 18
Head restraints ________ 23
Child safety ___________ 24
Airbag________________ 32
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all

cars (can depend on model variant, engine
variant, market specification, options or
accessories).
12 Safety
Safety belts Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are

provided for all seats.
The results of studies show that it is equally
WARNING important to wear safety belts in the rear
seat as in the front seats.
• Buckle up and adjust your safety belt
before driving off so that you can pay Safety belt reminder
full attention to the traffic. When the ignition is switched on, the safety
• Safety belts must be worn at all times belt reminder in the main instrument panel
by all occupants. will come on if the driver has not buckled up.
In addition an audible signal sounds for 4–
• Child safety, see page 24. 8 seconds, or until the driver fastens his
• Check that the locking tongue is prop- belt.
erly locked in the belt lock. The front seat passenger is reminded to Driver seat safety belt reminder
• In the event of a crash, a rear-seat buckle up by the Saab Information Display
passenger not wearing a safety belt (SID).
will be thrown forward against the
front-seat backrests. The stresses
imposed on the front seat passengers Use your seatbelt.
and belts are multiplied and can result
in needless injury or even death for all
car occupants.
Safety 13
Correct position for safety belt is advisable to remove thick items of
clothing.
• Refrain from tilting the backrest more than
WARNING necessary, as the safety belt provides
better protection when the seat is in the
Proper positioning of the safety belt is more upright position.
extremely important. • Only one person per safety belt!
• An out of position safety belt can result • For most of the time a safety belt is worn,
in the wearer sliding underneath the the retractor will allow the wearer freedom
belt in a crash (submarining) and of movement. The retractor locks up auto-
injury can result from the lap portion matically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn
cutting into the abdomen. sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are
• Never fasten the safety belt with the applied hard or a crash occurs.
Correct seating position shoulder belt behind the body or pull • Children up to 6 years of age must always
the belt off the shoulder and under the be seated in a child seat. Saab recom-
arm. mends the use of a child seat for children
• Two people must never share one up to the age of 10.
safety belt. In the event of a crash • Children who have grown out of a child
those sharing a belt risk being crushed seat should be restrained by the car’s
together and injured. standard three-point belts. Make sure that
the shoulder belt is not in contact with the
neck or throat. If it is, a booster seat/cush-
Consider this: ion may be necessary.
• Position the lap strap snugly and low
across the hips so that it just touches the
thighs.
The shoulder strap must be as far in on

the shoulder as possible.
• Check to ensure that the belt is not twisted
or rubbing against any sharp edges.
• There should not be any slack in the belt.
Pull the belt tight – particularly important
when thick outer clothing is worn. It
14 Safety
To fasten the belt Press the red button to release the belt The belt guide on door pillar
Front safety belts Press the red button on the belt buckle to Belt height adjustment,
release the belt.
Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert- Sport Sedan and SportCombi
The front safety belts have their lower
ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is The belt guide on the door pillar for the front
anchorage points on the seats. The safety
securely fastened. safety belts can be set at different heights.
belts follow the seats when the legroom is
Position the lap part low across the hips. adjusted. The front belt guide in the Convertible is not
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle adjustable due to the belt being incorpo-
Refer to page 276 for how to check the func- rated into the seat.
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to tion of the safety belts, cleaning, etc.
tighten the lap belt part.
The belt must be as far in on the shoulder as
possible.
Safety 15
Adjust the belt so that it is as high up as
possible without rubbing against the neck.
To avoid chafing in the case of a short
person, the guide can be lowered until the
belt comes about an inch (a few centime-
ters) from the throat but still provides safe
restraint.
Raise the belt guide by pushing it upward to
the desired position. To lower it, depress the
catch release button while lowering the
guide. Check that the guide locks in its new
position.
Safety belt use during pregnancy

Pregnant women must always wear a
safety belt to protect both themselves and
the unborn child.
The lap belt should be placed low, across
the hips and over the upper thighs.
16 Safety
Safety belt pretensioners Sport Sedan and SportCombi: The front Convertible: The front and rear safety belts
safety belts are equipped with pretension- are equipped with pretensioners and force
ers and force limiters. The pretensioners limiters. The pretensioners are activated in
WARNING are activated in the event of a violent frontal the event of a violent frontal or side-on
or side-on crash. The safety belt pretension- crash. The front safety belt pretensioners
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety ers are only activated if the safety belt in are only activated if the safety belt in ques-
belts, belt pretensioners and other question is in use but not activated should tion is in use.
components must be inspected and the car roll over. The safety belt pretensioners serve to
replaced as necessary. We recommend The safety belt pretensioners serve to reduce the movement of the body by ten-
that you contact a Saab dealer. reduce the forward movement of the body sioning the belt, including in a roll over
Never make any alterations or repairs to by tensioning the belt. The force limiters crash. The force limiters reduce belt loads
the safety belt yourself. We recommend reduce belt loads on the body by "slacken- on the body by "slackening" the safety belt
that you contact a Saab dealer for any ing" the safety belt slightly to absorb the slightly to absorb the body’s kinetic energy
necessary repairs. body’s kinetic energy as gradually as possi- as gradually as possible. Certain variants
ble. Certain variants are equipped with two- are equipped with two-step pretensioners
step pretensioners and they serve to reduce and they serve to reduce the forward move-
the forward movement of the body in the ment of the body in the same way as the
same way as the one-step pretensioners. one-step pretensioners.
Safety 17
Safety belts, rear seat, Sport
Sedan and SportCombi
Safety belts rear seat, Convertible, see
page 77
WARNING
• Make sure that the belt does not
become trapped when the backrest is
folded down or raised (see page 146).
• If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it
must be properly secured with the
safety belt. This reduces the risk of the
cargo being thrown about during hard Rear safety belts
braking or a crash, which could cause
personal injury. Press the red button on the buckle to
release the belt.
• Check that the belt is not twisted or
See page 276 for the checking of belt func-
lying against sharp edges.
tion, cleaning, etc.
• Make sure you use the correct safety
belt buckle. The buckles for the center Securing an item on the rear seat
and left-hand rear seats are close
together.
The three rear seats all have three-point

safety belts with inertia reels.
Fasten the belts by pulling the belt across
you and inserting the tongue into the buckle.
Check that it is securely fastened.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
possible.
18 Safety
Seats We recommend that adjustments to the

driver’s seat be performed in the following
order:
WARNING 1 Height
2 Legroom
Never adjust the driver’s seat except 3 Backrest rake angle
when the car is stationary.
4 Head restraint height
Lastly, adjust the position of the steering
Manually adjusted front seats 3 wheel (see page 128).
The following front seat adjustments can be
made to achieve a comfortable driving Electrically adjustable front seats 3
position: See page 20.
• Height 3
Electric heating, front seats 3
• Legroom Height adjustment 3
• Backrest rake angle See pages 114 and 123.
Lift the lever to raise the seat. The lever is
• Lumbar support firmness 3 spring-loaded to return to its neutral posi-
• Head restraint height tion. Repeated lifting of the lever will
increase the height in steps.
Press down the lever to lower the seat.
Repeated downward presses of the lever
will lower the seat in steps.
Safety 19
Adjusting the legroom Adjusting the backrest Adjusting the lumbar support
Legroom adjustment Backrest rake angle Lumbar support 3

Lift the lever under the front of the seat and Adjust the firmness of the lumbar support by
slide the seat to the desired position. turning the knob.
WARNING
WARNING The backrest should be upright during

driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
Check that the seat is locked in the new backrest can provide optimum protection
position. If not, it may move while the car in the event of emergency braking or a
is being driven and it could result in injury crash, in particular a rear-end crash.
to the occupant in the event of a crash.
To find the most comfortable position, turn
the knob to provide stepless adjustment of
the backrest.
20 Safety
Electrically adjustable front
seats 3
WARNING
• The seats are actuated by powerful
motors. Bear this in mind when adjust-
ing the seat, and make sure that noth-
ing gets caught and damaged. Ensure
that nothing can be trapped behind the
seat when adjusting it.
• Bear in mind that children can be
injured if they play with the electrically- Adjusting the height and angle Adjusting the legroom
operated seats.
• Always remove the remote control
when you leave the car to prevent
personal injury caused by the electri-
Height adjustment and seat Legroom adjustment
cally adjustable seats, for example, angle Adjust the legroom with the front lever.
due to children playing. Electrically Adjust the height of the seat with the rear
adjustable front seats with memory section of the front lever.
function, see page 21. Adjust the angle of the seat with the front
section of the front lever.
With the doors closed the seats can only be
adjusted when the ignition is ON.
However, there are two exceptions:
• To facilitate getting into the car, both seats
can be adjusted when either of the front
doors is open.
• The seats can be adjusted up to
2 minutes after both doors have been
closed (applicable only to cars without
window and sunroof pinch protection).
Safety 21
Adjusting the rake angle Adjusting the lumbar support Memory function buttons
Driver’s seat in Sport Sedan and Sport-
Combi
Backrest rake angle Memory function 3
Lumbar support 3
WARNING Adjust the firmness of the lumbar support by WARNING
turning the knob.
The backrest should be upright during The legroom of the electrically operated
driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and driver’s seat can always be adjusted,
backrest can provide optimum protection whether or not a front door is open and
in the event of emergency braking or a irrespective of the position of the ignition
crash, in particular a rear-end crash. switch.
Adjust the rake angle of the backrest with

the rear lever.
22 Safety
When the ignition is ON, all seat settings
can be adjusted. When the door is open and
before the remote control has been inserted
into the ignition switch, all seat settings can
be adjusted for up to 20 minutes.
The memory also includes the door mirror
settings.
Storing and restoring settings

1 Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
The lumbar support is not included by
the memory function.
2 Press and hold the M-button and then
press one of the preselect buttons (1, 2
or 3). A chime will sound to confirm that
the settings have been saved.
To recall programmed settings, press and
hold the desired memory button until the
seat and door mirrors adopt their pro-
grammed positions. The memory function
also includes the door mirror settings.
To facilitate reversing, the passenger-side
door mirror can be angled down, refer to
page 132.
Safety 23
Head restraints Therefore, the SAHR does not normally
need to be replaced or repaired after a rear-
Sport Sedan and sportCombi end crash.
Head restraint, Convertible, see page 76. The front and rear head restraints can be
raised and lowered to a number of positions.
WARNING • Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
sides and pull it straight up.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the • Lowering: Press the head restraint
head is optimally supported and the forward and downward.
center of the head restraint is at ear The rear head restraints can be fully low-
height, thus reducing the likelihood of ered to improve rearward vision when the
neck injury in a crash. rear seats are unoccupied.
• Raise the head restraints in the seats
that are occupied.
The front seats are equipped with Saab

Active Head Restraints (SAHRs). These are
designed to reduce the risk of neck injury if
the car is hit from behind.
The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-
ated by body weight. The mechanism is built
into the top of the backrest, where it is con-
nected to the head restraint.
In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
forced back against the backrest. This, in
turn, causes the mechanism to press the
head restraint forward and upward, thus lim-
iting the backward movement of the head.
24 Safety
Child safety
WARNING WARNING
WARNING • Never leave children unattended in a Protect children from getting

car, even for a short time. trapped in the trunk of your car
• Children must always be suitably – Children can suffer heat stroke, • Teach children not to play in or around
restrained in the car. perhaps die, in a matter of minutes. cars.
• DEATH or SERIOUS – Children can put the car into gear and
hurt themselves or others. • Watch children when loading or
INJURY can occur unloading the car so they don´t get
• Children 12 and under or • At gas stations, take the remote locked in by mistake.
shorter than 55 inches control out of the car while filling the
tank. • Always lock the doors and trunk of
(140 cm) can be killed by the your car, and keep the keys out of chil-
airbag • Never allow children to climb on top of dren´s sight and reach.
• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place or under motor vehicles.
• Keep the rear fold-down seat closed to
for children • Always look for children before back- help prevent children from getting into
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in ing your car out of a garage or drive- the trunk from inside the car.
the front way.
• Sit as far back as possible from the • To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning,
airbag never let a car idle in an enclosed
garage.
• ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
CHILD RESTRAINTS • Supervise young children around
buckets of water while washing your
car. Small children can drown in a
short time in less than an inch of water.
Safety 25
General information on child LATCH The LATCH system consists of top tether
safety LATCH (Lower Anchorages & Top tethers and lower anchorages . In this vehicle,
for CHildren) is a US/Canadian safety stan- LATCH is installed at the two outboard seat-
The same attention must be given to child
dard for a uniform method of fitting child ing positions in the rear seat, and there is a
safety in the car as is given to adults.
restraints without using the standard safety top tether on the rear center position (not
Children travel most safely when properly Convertible). The top tethers are located on
restrained. However, the type of restraint belts. Only certain child restraints are
equipped to utilize the LATCH system. top of the parcel shelf (Convertible: behind
must be appropriate for the size of the child. the head restraints), see page 28. They are
We recommend that you always consult The LATCH system is installed in the car to covered by a lid with a child seat anchor
your Saab dealer before fitting a child seat, facilitate proper fitting of child restraints symbol. The lower anchorages are located
child restraint or booster cushion. designed for and equipped with LATCH where the seat cushion and seat back come
Make sure you are acquainted with the attachments. together. There is a label above the inner
legal requirements for seating children lower anchorage, see picture on next page.
in the car. Label consists of a symbol of a child
Make sure that it is possible to fit a child restrained in a seat inside a circle.
restraint in accordance with the manufac- When fitting child restraints in cars you must
turer’s child restraint instructions. always read the instructions supplied by the
When fitting child restraints in cars you child restraint manufacturer.
must always read the instructions sup- If you have any questions regarding LATCH
plied by the child restraint manufacturer. please contact your Saab dealer.
Saab recommends the use of a rear-
facing child seat for as long as this is
possible - at a minimum for all children
under the age of 3 (approx. 15 kg). Use a
child seat approved for the weight of the
child.
Saab recommends the use of a booster seat
for children up to the age of 10.
26 Safety
Lower anchorages in the rear seat, Sport Sedan and SportCombi
Lower anchorages in the rear seat, Convertible

Safety 27
LATCH child seat installation
Before starting the installation, please read
through this instruction, and the child seat
installation instruction.
1 Place the child restraint on one of the
designated outboard rear seat cush-
ions.
2 Slide the attachment on the child
restraint in between the seat cushion
and backrest.
3 Press the child restraint down on the
seat, 1 in illustration.
4 Press the child restraint rearward, lining
up the inner restraint attachment arm Rigid 2-point lower anchorage with top Semi-rigid 2-point lower anchorage with
with the label, 2 in illustration. tether top tether
5 Connect the restraint attachment arms
to the anchorages 3 in illustration.
6 Follow the child restraint instructions to When fitting child restraints in cars you
confirm that both restraint attachment must always read the instructions sup-
arms are properly attached to the bars. plied by the child restraint manufacturer.
7 Attach the top tether strap to the in-car
anchorage and tighten according to the
restraint instructions, see page 28
and 30.
8 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that the restraint is securely
attached at both the lower anchorage
bars and the top tether strap.
Only use the belt supplied with the child
restraint.
For the top tether, only use the strap sup-
plied with the child restraint.
The availability of LATCH child restraints is
limited.
28 Safety
Child tether anchorages for
forward facing child seats
Sport Sedan
Convertible, see page 30
WARNING
Child top tether anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by Child tether anchorages in parcel shelf, Sport Sedan
correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult safety belts.
The car is provided with three top tether 7 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
anchorages. Use the one that is right behind child restraint is pressed hard against
Child restraints with a tether strap must be the seating position in which the child the backrest.
attached according to Canadian and U.S. restraint is to be installed and attach the 8 Pull the child restraint to make a second
safety standards. restraint as follows: check that the restraint is securely
If you have any questions regarding child attached at both the lower anchorages
1 Open the cover that is right behind the
anchorages please contact your Saab bars on the safety belts and the top
child restraint, 1 in illustration.
dealer. tether strap.
2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
3 Secure the lower part of the child
restraint by means of the lower anchor-
ages or the safety belts as described in
the child restraint installation instruction.
4 Lower the headrest and route the tether
over it.
5 Attach the tether to the anchorage, 2 in
illustration.
6 Close the cover to the middle position, 3
in illustration.
Safety 29
SportCombi
WARNING
to withstand only those loads imposed by
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult safety belts.
3 Lower the headrest and route the tether

Child restraints with a tether strap must be
over it.
attached according to Canadian and U.S.
safety standards. 4 Attach the tether to the anchorage.
If you have any questions regarding child 5 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
anchorages please contact your Saab child restraint is pressed hard against
dealer. the backrest.
The car is provided with three top tether 1 Pull the child restraint to make a second
anchorages. Use the one that is right behind check that the restraint is securely
the seating position in which the child attached at both the lower anchorages
restraint is to be installed and attach the bars on the safety belts and the top
restraint as follows: tether strap
1 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
2 Secure the lower part of the child
ages or the safety belts as described in
the child restraint installation instruction.
30 Safety
Convertible
WARNING
to withstand only those loads imposed by
How to take away the head restraint Top tether anchorages in the rear seat
Under no circumstances are they to be 1 Raise the head restraint
used for adult safety belts. 2 Push the catch forward and pull the head
restraint straight upward
Child restraints with a tether strap must be
attached according to Canadian and U.S.
safety standards. ages or the safety belts as described in
If you have any questions regarding child the child restraint installation instruction.
anchorages please contact your Saab 4 Attach the tether to the anchorage.
WARNING
dealer.
5 Tighten the tether so that the back of the If the size of the child restraint makes it
The car is provided with two top tether child restraint is pressed hard against
anchorages. Use the one that is right behind impossible to put the head restraint back
the backrest. on, place it in the trunk.
the seating position in which the child
restraint is to be installed and attach the 6 Pull the child restraint to make a second
restraint as follows: check that the restraint is securely
attached at both the lower anchorages
1 Remove the head restraint on the seat- bars on the safety belts and the top
ing position where the child restraint tether strap.
shall be fitted. 7 Put the head restraint back on and make
2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat. sure it is secure mounted. Adjust it in its
3 Secure the lower part of the child highest position.
Safety 31
Installation of child restraint If fitting a child restraint that is intended to be The safety belt locking function will be deac-
using the standard safety belt secured in position by the standard safety tivated when the safety belt is retracted.
belt, make use of the locking function of the 1 Disengage the safety belt latch from the
belt. buckle.
WARNING Locking the belt lessens the risk that the 2 Disengage the safety belt from the child
seat will work loose while the car is in restraint, according to the instructions
Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s motion. from the child restraint manufacturer.
instructions on the use of child restraint 1 Position the child restraint in the back
systems can cause your child to strike the 3 Let the safety belt retract until the click-
seat. ing sound ceases.
vehicle´s interior during a sudden stop or
crash. 2 Route the belt in the restraint according
to the installation instruction of the
restraint.
Child restraints that are approved for rear-
3 Pull out the belt completely until it stops.
ward facing installation in the rear seat can Then let the belt slowly pull in the slack.
be positioned in any of the three rear places. Clicking sound indicates that the lock
Make sure that it is possible to fit it in accor- function is in work.
dance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 4 Pull the shoulder belt tight to secure the
When fitting child restraints in cars you child restraint in position.
must always read the instructions sup- 5 Check for correct locking function by
plied by the child restraint manufacturer. pulling on the belt. The belt must not
unreel.
32 Safety
Airbag Airbag system components There are two impact sensors on the front
bumper, under the lacquered shell. Very
• Airbag in steering wheel soon after the moment of impact, these
• Airbag in instrument panel in front of register that the car is involved in a crash.
passenger seat Using this information and data from the
• Side airbags in front seat backrests central sensor in the control module, the
Convertible: The side airbags help control module determines whether or not to
WARNING protect the head also inflate the airbags. The control module also
• Inflatable curtains along length of headlin- controls whether other components of the
To reduce risk of death or serious injury: airbag system are to be deployed: safety
ing (from front to rear roof pillars)
• Always wear your safety belt. (Sport Sedan only) belt pretensioners, inflatable curtains (Sport
Sedan and SportCombi) and roll over bars
• Always adjust your seat so that you • Safety belt pretensioners for front seats (Convertible).
are as far back as possible but still Convertible: and outer rear seats.
Which airbag system components are
able to operate the pedals and reach The airbag system supplements the protec- deployed depends on a number of factors,
the steering wheel and controls tion provided by the safety belts to further such as the force of the crash and the angle
comfortably. enhance the safety of occupants taller than of impact.
• Passengers 12 and under or shorter 55 in. (140 cm).
If the airbag system registers forces equiv-
than 55 inches (140 cm) must always When the system is activated at the moment alent to a high-speed crash (airbags inflated
travel in the rear seat as the car is fitted of impact, the airbag inflates and then to Stage II), the inflatable curtains will also
with a passenger airbag. deflates through holes in the back. The be activated (Sport Sedan and SportCombi)
whole operation takes roughly 0.1 second, see page 42.
• Never fit a child seat in front of the quicker than the blink of an eye.
passenger airbag. If a fault arises in the airbag system during
The steering wheel and passenger airbags a journey, the airbag warning lamp on the
are so-called smart airbags. The driver and main instrument panel will come on and the
passenger airbag system compensates for Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
safety belt usage and the force of the crash
at the moment of impact.
Airbag malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
Safety 33
Inflated airbag (driver’s side). Both front airbags inflated

Inflation and deflation of airbag takes
approx. 0.1 s
The driver and passenger front airbags are Note:

triggered by violent front-end crashes. They Impact sensors react differently depending
are not activated by minor front-end on whether or not the front safety belts on
impacts, if the car overturns or by rear- and the driver’s and passenger sides are used.
side-impacts. Situations can therefore arise where only
The car is equipped as standard with one of the airbags inflates. It is also possible
a passenger airbag. for only the safety belt pretensioners to be
activated and for the airbags to remain unin-
flated.
If only Stage I is activated at the moment of
impact, Stage II will automatically be acti-
vated later to neutralize the gas generator in
the airbag.
34 Safety
Airbag system Accessories and other equipment must

1 Steering wheel with integral airbag not be fitted to the surfaces marked as
2 Passenger airbag these are where the airbags inflate in the
3 Side airbag event of a crash.
4 Inflatable curtain (Sport Sedan and SportCombi)
5 Sensors in front bumper
6 Sensor, side-impact protection
7 Sensor, side-impact protection (Sport Sedan and SportCombi)
8 Electronic control module and central sensor (SDM)
Safety 35
WARNING • Never attach anything to the steering • If the airbag warning light remains
wheel or passenger side of the instru- on after the car has been started or
• Even if the car is equipped with ment panel, as this could result in comes on while you are driving, have
injury if the airbag should inflate. The the car checked immediately. We
AIRBAGS, safety belts must still
same applies to anything you might recommend that you contact a Saab
always be worn by all occupants.
have in your mouth, such as a pipe, for dealer. The warning light could signify
• Note that because an airbag inflates instance. that the airbags may not inflate in a
and deflates extremely rapidly, it will crash, or they could even inflate with-
not provide protection against a • Some components of the airbag will
out a crash. See page 87.
second impact occurring in the same be warm for a short time. In some
incident. Always use your safety belt. circumstances the airbag can cause • Fumes are generated by the chemical
minor burns or abrasions to the body reaction that inflates the airbag.
• Always sit with the whole of your back
when the airbag inflates/deflates. Skin surfaces that show signs of irrita-
in contact with the backrest of the seat,
and with your seat as far back as is tion should be washed with clean
• Never rest your hands or forearms on
practical.Otherwise you will be thrown water and a mild soap as soon as
the steering-wheel center padding.
back against the backrest when the possible.
airbag inflates which could cause you In the event of eye irritation, flush the
injury or death. The airbag needs eyes thoroughly with clean water for at
room in which to inflate. least 20 minutes.
In case of persistent irritation, consult
a doctor.
36 Safety
Operation of the steering wheel airbag in Front passenger seat
a front-end crash
WARNING
• DEATH or SERIOUS
Moment of impact.
INJURY can occur
WARNING • Children 12 and under or
shorter than 55 inches
Never secure a rear-facing child seat in (140 cm) can be killed by the
Sensors detect a the right front seat of a car equipped with airbag
deceleration and send a passenger airbag. Inflation of the airbag • The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place
a signal via the control in the event of a crash could seriously for children
module to a gas gen-
erator that inflates the injure or kill a child.
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
airbag. the front
The system is the same as that used on the
• Sit as far back as possible from the
driver’s side.
airbag
The airbag systems are interconnected and
• ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
The inflating airbag have a common warning light . The pas- CHILD RESTRAINTS
cushions the driver. senger airbag module is housed in the
fascia above the glove box and is marked • Never allow a child to stand in front of
"AIRBAG". the seat or to sit on the lap of a front
Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a seat passenger. Serious injury or
moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal death could result if the airbag is
crash, even if the passenger seat is unoccu- inflated in a crash.
Airbag now fully
inflated. pied. • The glove box must be closed while
The car is equipped as standard with travelling. An open glove box door
a passenger airbag. could cause leg injuries in the event of
a crash.
The airbag starts to

deflate.
Safety 37
• Never place anything on the dash or in

Passenger Sensing System
front of the seat as, in addition to being Vehicles with a passenger sensing system
a hazard to passengers, this could have indicator LEDs on the facia. The indi-
interfere with the function of the airbag cators will be lit during the system check.
in the event of a crash. The same When the system check is complete, either
applies to the mounting of accessories the ON or the OFF LED, will be lit. See
on the dash. Airbag warning light on page 87. If your
vehicle does not have the indicators pic-
• Keep feet on the floor – never put feet tured, then your vehicle does not have the
up on the dash, on the seat or out of passenger sensing system.
the window. The passenger sensing system will turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
• Do not carry anything in your lap. under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag and the side airbags are Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
not part of the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with
sensors that are part of the right front pas-
senger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a Saab recommends that child restraints be
properly-seated occupant and determine if secured in a rear seat, including an infant
the passenger’s frontal airbag should be riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child
enabled (may inflate) or not. riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster seat.
Accident statistics show that children are
safer if they are restrained in the rear rather Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accom-
than the front seat. modate a rear-facing child restraint. A label
on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-
facing child seat in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so
great, if the airbag deploys.
38 Safety
The passenger sensing system is designed When the passenger sensing system has
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal turned off the passenger’s frontal air bag,
WARNING airbag if: the off indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can • the right front passenger seat is unoccu-
pied If a child restraint has been installed and the
be seriously injured or killed if the right on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off.
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is • the system determines that an infant is Remove the child restraint from the vehicle
because the back of the rear-facing child present in a rear-facing infant seat and reinstall the child restraint following the
restraint would be very close to the inflat- • the system determines that a small child child restraint manufacturer’s directions and
ing airbag. is present in a forward-facing child refer to Installation of child restraint using
Even though the passenger sensing restraint the standard safety belt on page 31.
system is designed to turn off the passen- • the system determines that a small child If after reinstalling the child restraint and
ger’s frontal airbag if the system detects a is present in a booster seat restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still
rear-facing child restraint, no system is • a right front passenger takes his/her lit, check to make sure that the vehicle’s
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that weight off of the seat for a period of time seatback is not pressing the child restraint
an airbag will not deploy under some into the seat cushion. If this happens,
• the right front passenger seat is occupied
unusual circumstance, even though it is slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and
by a smaller person, such as a child who
turned off. Saab recommends that rear- adjust the seat cushion if possible. Also
has outgrown child restraints
facing child restraints be secured in the make sure the child restraint is not trapped
rear seat, even if the airbag is off. • or if there is a critical problem with the
airbag system or the passenger sensing under the vehicle head restraint. If this hap-
system. pens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child
in the child restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle and check with your dealer.
Safety 39
The passenger sensing system is designed If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right Aftermarket equipment, such as seat
to enable (may inflate) the right front front passenger’s seat, but the off indicator covers, can affect how well the passenger
passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the is lit, it could be because that person is not sensing system operates. You may want to
system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, consider not using seat covers or other
sitting properly in the right front passenger’s turn the vehicle off and ask the person to aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has
seat. When the passenger sensing system place the seatback in the fully upright posi- the passenger sensing system. See Adding
has allowed the airbag to be enabled, the on tion, then sit upright in the seat, centered on Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehi-
indicator will light and stay lit to remind you the seat cushion, with the person’s legs cle for more information about modifications
that the airbag is active. comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle that can affect how the system operates.
For some children who have outgrown child and have the person remain in this position
restraints and for very small adults, the pas- for about two minutes. This will allow the
senger sensing system may or may not turn system to detect that person and then WARNING
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, enable the passenger’s airbag.
depending upon the person’s seating pos- Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
ture and body build. Everyone in your vehi- seat or between the passenger’s seat
cle who has outgrown child restraints
WARNING cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
should wear a safety belt properly —
whether or not there is an airbag for that per- If the airbag readiness light in the instru- sensing system.
son. ment panel cluster ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be
wrong with the airbag system. If this ever
happens, havethe vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person
sitting in the right front passenger’s seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
airbag. See Airbag warning lamp on
page 43 for more on this, including impor-
tant safety information.
40 Safety
Head protection Side-impact protection • The side-impact protection will only be
The pillar trim and headlining (not Converti- activated in the event of a side-on
ble soft top) are designed to absorb energy, crash and not in the event of a rear-
softening possible blows to the head. After end crash or the car rolling over. For
a crash, these items must be changed in the the Convertible’s Roll-over protection
seat positions that were occupied. Never fit see page 78.
accessories to the pillar trim or headlining WARNING
as these could reduce the effectiveness of • Damage or wear to the seat cover, or
the head protection and inflatable curtain • This car is equipped with side airbags the seat seam, in the area of the side
(Sport Sedan and SportCombi). and no extra seat cover should be airbag must be repaired immediately.
fitted. Failure to observe this warning We recommend that you contact a
could result in the side airbags not Saab dealer.
inflating as intended and thus not
providing the intended protection
either. The side airbags, which help protect the
upper body (head also in Convertible), are
• Never place any object in the area that integrated in the outside edges of the front
would be occupied by the inflated air- seat backrests. The side impact protection
bag. of the Sport Sedan also includes inflatable
curtains (see page 42).
• For optimum protection, sit upright in The side impact protection will be activated
the seat, with your safety belt correctly if certain predetermined conditions are met
fastened. such as the force and angle of the impact,
the speed of the car on impact, and at which
point on the car´s side the impact occurs.
Safety 41
The side-impact protection is only activated
on the side of impact, while the safety belt
pretensioners on both sides are deployed.
The front seats and outer rear seats have
safety belt pretensioners.
There are two sensors on each side of the
car, one at the rear of each door sill and one
in the lower part of each C-pillar.
Convertible: The Convertible has two side
impact protection sensors, one on each side
of the car. These are located at the rear of
the sills.
Inflated side airbag and inflatable curtain, Inflated side airbag with head protection,
Sport Sedan and SportCombi Convertible
42 Safety
Inflatable curtains, Sport Sedan • Do not position a sun visor or similar
and SportCombi item in the area that would be filled by
the inflatable curtain.
WARNING • To reduce the risk of head injuries in
the event of a crash, the roof pillars
• Do not sit with your head resting and headlining incorporate cushioning
against the side window. The inflat- material. Do not attach anything to the
able curtain is designed to inflate car’s headlining, roof pillars or side
between the window and the head. panels as this could prevent the side-
Resting the head against the window impact protection from providing the
could prevent the inflatable curtain intended protection.
from providing the intended
protection. • Do not stack loads so high that they
could encumber the inflatable curtain Inflated inflatable curtain, Sport Sedan
• Hang only light clothes from the hooks
on the rear seat courtesy handles. The in the event of a crash.
items of clothing must not contain
heavy or sharp objects. Do not use The inflatable curtains, which protect the
wire coat hangers. head, are concealed along the lengths of
the headlining (all the way from front to rear
roof pillars).
The inflatable curtains inflate at the same
time as the side airbags in the front seats in
case of a side-on impact.
The inflatable curtains reduce the risk of
head injuries to the occupants of the car’s
outer seats. The inflatable curtains deploys
into the window area between the front and
rear roof pillars.
If the airbag system registers forces equiv-
alent to a high-speed frontal crash (Stage II
for the steering wheel and passenger
airbags), the inflatable curtains will also be
deployed.
Safety 43
Airbag warning lamp What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
WARNING After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even
• If the airbag readiness light stays on realize the airbag inflated. Some compo-
nents of the airbag module - the steering
after you start your vehicle, it means
wheel hub for the driver's frontal airbag, the
the airbag system may not be working
instrument panel for the right front passen-
properly. See page 87.
ger's frontal airbag or the ceiling of your
• The airbags in your vehicle may not vehicle near the side windows - will be hot
inflate in a crash, or they could even for a short time. The parts of the bag that
inflate without a crash. come into contact with you may be warm,
• To help avoid injury to yourself or but not too hot to touch. There will be some
others, have your vehicle serviced smoke and dust coming from the vents in
Prohibited seating position the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does
right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle. not prevent the driver from seeing or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
For optimal protection, do not sit too close to people from leaving the vehicle.
the door. Bear this in mind, for example, if
someone is sleeping in the car. The inflat-
able curtain comes down from the headlin-
ing and covers a large portion of the side
windows.
44 Safety
• Let only qualified technicians work on Servicing the airbag system
your airbag system. Improper service can The airbag system must be inspected as
WARNING mean that your airbag system will not part of the normal service program but oth-
work properly. See your dealer for erwise may be regarded as maintenance-
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in service.
the air. This dust could cause breathing free.
Notice: If you damage the covering for
problems for people with a history of the driver's or the right front passenger's
asthma or other breathing trouble. To airbag, or the side impact airbag cover-
avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should ing on the ceiling near the side windows,
get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you the bag may not work properly. You may
have breathing problems but can not get
have to replace the airbag module in the
out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, steering wheel, both the airbag module
then get fresh air by opening a window or and the instrument panel for the right
a door. If you experience breathing prob- front passenger's airbag, or side impact
lems following an airbag deployment, you airbag module and ceiling covering for
should seek medical attention. the roof-mounted side impact airbag. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield break-
age may also occur from the right front pas-
senger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
After an airbag inflates, you will need
some new parts for your airbag system. If
you do not get them, the airbag system
will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts.
The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module which
records information after a crash. See
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders on page 292.
Safety 45
Scrapping or working on airbag Frequently asked questions on In addition, airbags provide no protection
and belt pretensioners function of the airbag against a secondary impact occurring in the
same incident. So there is no doubt about
Do you still need to wear a safety belt if air- the benefit of wearing safety belts at all
bags are fitted? times.
WARNING
Yes, always! The airbag system compo-
Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs
• Under no circumstances should any nents merely supplement the car’s normal
room to inflate.
modifications be made that affect the safety system. Moreover, the front airbags
will only be actuated in a moderate to severe The airbag inflates very quickly and power-
steering wheel or the airbag’s electri- fully in order to protect an adult, before they
cal circuitry. frontal, or near-frontal crash, which means,
of course, that they provide no protection in are thrown forward, in a serious frontal
• During any welding, both battery minor frontal crashes, major rear- or side- crash.
cables must be disconnected and crashes or if the car rolls over. How do I position the seat to leave room for
covered. The safety belts help to reduce the sideway the airbag to inflate?
• Before quick drying paint in the vicinity movement of the body in a crash. Don’t have your seat too far forward.
of the electronic control module, the But they also ensure that, if a crash occurs Recline the seat back to increase the dis-
module’s grounding points and wiring in which the airbags are inflated, the airbag tance between you and the airbag. For short
must be covered. will make the optimum contact with the drivers, special accessory pedal extensions
occupant, i.e. square on from the front. If the are available through your Saab dealer.
• Airbags and safety belt pretensioners occupant meets the airbag in an offset posi- Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with
must be deployed under controlled tion, the protection afforded will be reduced. great force – to be fast enough to protect an
conditions before the car is scrapped
adult in the seat.
or any of the system’s components are
removed. Airbags or belt pretension-
ers that have been deployed as a
result of a crash must be replaced by
new ones.
• Airbag-system components must
never be transferred for use in another
vehicle.
• All work involving the scrapping or
replacement of airbags or belt preten-
sioners must be carried out by autho-
rized personnel only.
46 Safety
When do the airbags in the steering wheel How loud is the inflation? What should I do if the AIR-BAG warning
and passenger side of the dash board The noise of the inflation is certainly loud, light comes on?
inflate? but it is of an very short duration and will not If the warning light is on, it means that a fault
The airbag will only be inflated under certain damage your hearing. For a short time after- has been detected in the system. The
predetermined conditions in a moderate to wards you could experience a buzzing airbag cannot be relied on to operate as
severe frontal, or near-frontal crash, noise in your ears. intended and it might even be activated
depending on such factors as the force and Most people who have experienced it erroneously. You should therefore take the
angle of the impact, the speed of the car on cannot remember the noise of the inflation car to a workshop. We recommend that you
impact, and the resistance to deformation of at all – all they remember is the noise of the contact a Saab dealer as soon as possible.
the impacting object. crash.
The airbag can only be activated once in the
same incident. Can you still use a child seat in the front if a
Do not attempt to drive the car after an passenger airbag is installed?
airbag has been inflated, even if it is possi- Definitely not!
ble.
Children 12 and under or shorter than
55 inches (140 cm) can be killed by the air-
What won’t trigger the airbag? bag.
The airbag will not be activated in all frontal The back seat is the safest place for chil-
crashes. For instance, if the car has hit dren.
something relatively soft and yielding (e.g. a Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
snow drift or a hedge) or a solid object at a front.
low impact speed, the airbag will not neces-
sarily be triggered. Sit as far back as possible from the airbag.
Always use seat belts and child restraints.
Safety 47
Are the dust and fumes given off when the Adding Equipment to Your Because I have a disability, I have to get my
airbag operates at all harmful? Airbag-Equipped Vehicle vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
Most people who have remained in a car this will affect my advanced airbag system?
Is there anything I might add to the front or
with little or no ventilation for several min- sides of the vehicle that could keep the air- Changing or moving any parts of the front
utes complained only of minor irritation of bags from working properly? seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
the throat and eyes. Avoid as much as pos- diagnostic module or the inside rearview
Yes. If you add things that change your vehi-
sible getting dust on your skin as there is a mirror can affect the operation of the
risk of skin irritation. cle’s frame, bumper system, front end or advanced airbag system. If you have ques-
side sheet metal or height, they may keep tions, call Customer Assistance. The phone
If you suffer from asthma, the incident may the airbag system from working properly.
bring on an attack, in which case you should numbers and addresses for Customer
Also, the airbag system may not work prop-
follow the normal procedure advised by Assistance can be found on page 290.
erly if you relocate any of the airbag sen-
your doctor. It is advisable to consult a sors. If you have any questions about this,
doctor afterwards. you should contact Saab Customer Assis-
tance before you modify your vehicle. The
phone numbers and addresses for Cus-
tomer Assistance can be found on page
290.
48 Safety
(This page has been left blank.)
Security 49
Security
Doors ________________ 50
Central locking ________ 50
Car alarm _____________ 58
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).
50 Security
Doors Central locking A key code number is supplied with your

car. This number needs to be quoted for
Open the door by lifting the door handle. ordering a new traditional key (contained in
The following message appears on the WARNING the remote control). Therefore, keep this
Saab Information Display (SID) if a door is number in a safe place.
not closed (text displayed first when vehicle Leaving children or pets unattended in a The remote control contains an electronic
speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and the locked car is dangerous. It is also danger- code that is unique to your car. When the
door has still not been closed): ous to leave children in a vehicle with the remote control is inserted into the ignition
ignition key. A child or others could be switch, this code is checked. If the code is
badly injured or even killed. incorrect, the car will not start.
Close doors.
The car is supplied with two remote con-
trols. It is possible to have up to five remote
Remote control controls programmed for the car at any one
The remote control and ignition key are inte- time. If one is lost, a replacement should be
grated in one unit, and referred to in this obtained as soon as possible. We recom-
manual as the remote control. mend that you contact a Saab dealer. When
The remote control contains a mechanical a new key is programmed into the car, the
key, referred to in this manual as the tradi- lost key will be deprogrammed automati-
tional key. This traditional key can be used cally.
in an emergency to lock or unlock the
driver’s door from outside (see page 52). Note:
This key does not fit the ignition switch. If a new remote control has to be ordered
and programmed, at least one old one is
required for the locking system’s electronic
unit to recognize the new (ordered) remote
control.
Once the new remote control has been pro-
grammed, the old unit that is lost will not
work. Therefore you should carry two
remote controls separately, especially on
long journeys.
Security 51
Remote control functions
NOTICE Button Pressed once Pressed Hold and
twice press the
button more
The remote control contains delicate than 2 s
electronics. Locks all doors.
• Do not expose it to water.
• Avoid rough handling. Unlocks driver´s Sport Sedan: Comfort
door. The other opening, see
• Do not place the remote control where doors are page 129.
it may be subjected to high tempera- unlocked.
tures, e.g. on the instrument panel. SportCombi:
The other
• Warm the remote control in your doors and tail-
gate are
hands for a couple of minutes if it has unlocked.
Remote control become very cold to prevent malfunc- Sport Sedan:
1 Locks car tion. Unlocks and
2 Unlocks car and turns on cabin lighting slightly opens
3 Unlocks and opens trunk lid. • For details on changing the battery, the trunk lid.
4 Turns on exterior and cabin lighting. refer to page 56. SportCombi:
Activates panic function Unlocks the tail-
gate.
Checks number
of remote con-
trols, see
page 55.
Turns on exterior Panic alarm
and cabin light- (activates
ing *) (for 30 s) or alarm manu-
turns off lighting ally), see
and deactivates page 60.
panic alarm.
*) parking lights, side direction indicators,

taillights and license plate lighting.
52 Security
Locking/unlocking the car Remote unlocking
Pressing the button once: the driver´s
WARNING door is unlocked.
Pressin a second time:
Leaving children or pets unattended in a Sport Sedan: the rest of the doors are
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger- unlocked.
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the SportCombi: the rest of the doors and tail-
ignition key. A child or others could be gate are unlocked.
badly injured or even killed.
The hazard warning lights will flash twice to
Never lock anyone in the car. confirm.
Remote locking and unlocking also control Saab Information Display (SID), see
the car alarm. page 93.
Locking/unlocking the front left-hand door
Remote locking Intermittent malfunctioning with the traditional key
Equipment in the vicinity of the car that uses 1 Lock
Press the button once: the same frequency as the remote control 2 Unlock
Sport Sedan: all doors locked. may cause interference to the remote con-
SportCombi: all doors and tailgate locked. trol signal. In this case, retry from another
angle and aim at the receiver located by the If remote unlocking should fail to work
The hazard warning lights will flash once to steering wheel.
confirm. 1 Remove the traditional key from the
remote control by pressing the emblem
on the reverse of the remote control.
(This key only fits the front left-hand
door.)
2 Unlock the door with the key.
The car alarm will be tripped. To silence the
alarm, insert the remote control into the igni-
tion switch.
Security 53
Locking a car with dead battery Trunk lid/Tailgate
The steering wheel lock requires sufficient Opening
battery voltage to lock and unlock. If the bat- Sport Sedan: The trunk lid is unlocked and
tery voltage drops below a certain level
while the remote control is in the ignition slightly opened when the button on the
switch, you will not be able to remove the remote control or on the inside of the driver’s
remote control. door is pressed once.
If you must leave the car, proceed as SportCombi: The tailgate is unlocked (not
follows: opened) when the button on the remote
1 Lock the car by pressing down the lock control or on the inside of the driver’s door
buttons on the doors. is pressed once.
2 Lock the front left door from outside with The hazard warning lights will flash three
the traditional key (see page 52). The times to confirm.
car is now locked but the car alarm will Opening button on driver’s door
remain inactive. Closing
Sport Sedan: The trunk lid is locked when
closed.
SportCombi: The tailgate is not locked
when closed. It is locked together with the
doors when button on the remote con-
trol is pressed once.
If the doors are locked when the trunk lid is
closed it is armed and the movement sensor
in the cabin will be armed.
54 Security
Switches on front doors
The central locking can also be operated
from inside the car using the button by each
front door handle.
Locking the car with the remote control ren-
ders these buttons inoperative.
Sport Sedan: If you are sitting in the car and
pressing the button on the driver’s
door, the driver’s door will unlock. Pressing
the button a second time will unlock the
remaining doors.
SportWagon: If you are sitting in the car
and pressing the button on the driver’s Central locking switch Child safety locks
door, the driver’s door will unlock. Pressing
the button a second time will unlock the
remaining doors and the tailgate.
The button on the passenger door works in
Child safety locks
the same way except that this first unlocks The rear doors are equipped with child
the passenger door. During this operation safety locks that are activated by means of
the rear doors remain locked. a catch next to the door latch.
If the car is left with one or more doors open, Insert a screwdriver or the traditional key
the interior lighting will be switched off auto- (enclosed in the remote control) and turn it
matically after 20 minutes. This is to prevent 45° in the direction shown on the label on
the battery from running flat. Also, if the car the door.
has electrically adjustable seats, these will When the child safety lock is in the locked
cease to operate. position, the door can only be opened from
outside the car.
WARNING
If small children are carried in the rear
seat, the safety locks on the rear doors
should be activated to prevent uninten-
tional opening from the inside.
Security 55
Trunk Release Handle Reprogramming lock system
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release functions
handle located inside the trunk on the latch. Certain lock system functions can be
This handle will glow following exposure to reprogrammed. We recommend that you
light. Pull the release handle down to open contact a Saab dealer (see page 309).
the trunk from inside.
Checking the number of remote
NOTICE controls
To check the number of remote controls that
The trunk release handle was not are programmed for the car:
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid or as an anchor point when securing 1 Insert the remote control into the ignition
items in the trunk. Improper use of the switch and turn it to ON.
trunk release could damage it Trunk Release Handle 2 Press and hold the button for more
than 2 seconds within 30 seconds after
the ignition switch has been turned to
the ON position.
3 The Saab Information Display (SID) will
now display the number of remote
controls that are programmed for your
car, and which of these (1–5) is in the
ignition switch.
Example of SID message:
2: standard key
Key No: 1
56 Security
Changing the key battery Battery type: For optimum performance in
all temperatures and good service life, Saab
recommends the use of a Sony or Pana-
WARNING sonic CR2032, 3V lithium battery.
The battery should last for about 4 years of
Keep the battery and other small compo- normal use.
nents of the remote control out of reach of The battery type is marked on the inside of
children. the remote control. Avoid leaving finger-
prints on the faces of the battery.
NOTICE 1 Press the emblem on the reverse of the
remote control to remove the traditional
The electronics of the remote control are key.
sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Incor-
rect handling when changing the battery Press the emblem to remove
can damage the remote control. Avoid the traditional key
touching electronic components of the
remote control with your hands.
2 Insert the tip of the key into the small slot
When the voltage of the remote control bat- and turn the key to split the remote
tery drops below a certain level, the Saab control.
Information Display (SID) will display:
Remote control battery

low. Replace battery.
Change the battery as soon as possible to

avoid malfunctioning.
Security 57
5 After changing the battery in the remote Immobilizer
control, it is only possible to use the The remote control contains an electronic
remote control a limited number of times code that is unique to your car. When the
before synchronization with the car is remote control is inserted into the ignition
lost. Therefore, do not press the buttons switch, this code is checked and the LED on
on the remote control repeatedly directly the dashboard double-flashes for
after changing the battery. 3 seconds. If the code is correct, the car can
Unlock the car and insert the remote be started.
control into the ignition switch to
synchronize the remote control and car. Each time you remove the remote control
from the ignition, the electronic starting
If the central locking system does not work interlock is activated, the LED double-
after changing the battery and the car is flashes for 3 seconds and the car becomes
locked, proceed as follows: immobilized. If an incorrect remote control is
1 Unlock the front left door with the tradi- now inserted into the ignition switch (e.g.
Change the battery and fit together
tional key. If the car has a car alarm, this the remote control of another car), the
the two halves of the remote control
will be tripped. immobilizer will remain operative (the LED
2 Open the door and insert the remote will not flash for 3 s) and it will not be possi-
3 Change the battery. Fit the new battery control into the ignition switch. If the car ble to start the car.
so that it is positioned in the same way has a car alarm, this will be silenced. If the immobilizer system malfunctions, the
as the old battery, with the positive (+) The remote control and receiver unit are Saab Information Display (SID) displays:
side facing down. now synchronized.
4 Fit the two halves of the remote control Immobilizer failure.
together and press them together until Try starting again.
you hear several clicks. Avoid pressing Contact Saab dealer.
the buttons. Reinsert the traditional key
into the remote control.
58 Security
If, when inserted into the ignition switch,
there is a problem checking the electronic
Car alarm The alarm is armed 11 seconds after the car
has been locked by remote control.
code of the remote control, the following During the delay period, the LED shines
message will appear on the SID: WARNING constantly. It will then start to flash once
every 3 seconds. The LED is located on the
Key not accepted. Leaving children or pets unattended in a dashboard.
Contact Saab dealer. locked car is dangerous. It is also danger- If a door or the trunk lid is open when the car
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the is locked with the remote control, the LED
ignition key. A child or others could be will flash 3 times per second for
Visit a Saab dealer to have the problem badly injured or even killed. 11 seconds. Check that the doors, hood
checked and rectified. and trunk lid are closed.
The car alarm is armed when the car is If the signal persists, contact a Saab dealer
locked with the remote control. to have the problem checked and rectified.
The car alarm will not be armed if you
lock the car with the traditional key (see Locking the trunk lid:
page 52). Sport Sedan: If you open the trunk lid from
All the doors, the hood and the trunk lid are outside the car with the button on the
monitored by the alarm. remote control, you must lock the car with
the button to arm the car alarm.
SportCombi: If you unlock and/or open the

trunk lid from outside the car with the
button on the remote control, you must lock
the car with the button to arm the car
alarm.
Security 59
To avoid any inconvenience, make sure that Arming the car alarm What trips the alarm?
anyone using the car is familiar with how the The alarm is armed when all doors, the hood The alarm will be tripped if:
car alarm and the locking system work. and the trunk lid are closed and you lock the
If the alarm has been tripped since the car car with the remote control. • a door, the hood or the trunk lid is opened
was last locked, the Saab Information Dis- • somebody tries to hotwire the car
play (SID) will display:
Signals when the alarm is tripped
Alarm has been triggered If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm
since being armed. signals will be set off:
• all direction indicators flash for 5 minutes.
If a fault arises in the car alarm system, the • the horn sounds for 30-second intervals
Saab Information Display (SID) will display: with 10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles).
The signals can vary between markets
and due to legal and insurance require-
Theft protection failure.
ments.
60 Security
Switching off the alarm if tripped Panic function
If the alarm has been triggered (direction NOTICE The car alarm includes a panic function.
indicators flashing and horn sounding) it can This function allows the alarm to be started
be turned off by pressing one of the buttons • It is possible to inadvertently deacti-
vate the car alarm and at the same manually, for example, to attract attention.
on the remote control or, if you are sitting in The panic alarm can only be activated while
time unlock the car, if the button on the
the car, by turning the ignition to ON (see the car is stationary. The alarm is silenced if
key is pressed by mistake when the
below). the car is driven off.
car is still within its range.
Turns off lights and horn. • When locking the car by remote When the alarm is tripped, the lights and
Unlocks car. control in extremely cold weather, it is horn come on for 3 minutes or until you
advisable to check that the lock press one of the remote control buttons.
Turns off lights and horn. To start the alarm manually proceed as
Car remains locked. system has operated properly. To do
so, check that the interior locking follows:
Turns off lights and horn. buttons are all down.
Unlocks trunk. If not, unlock and relock the car again. • Press and hold the button on the
remote control for more than 2 seconds,
Turns off lights and horn. or if you are sitting in the car...
Turns on exterior and cabin light-
ing. Car remains locked. • Press and hold the or button on
If sitting in the car: Turn the remote one of the front doors for more than
control to ON in the ignition switch 2 seconds.
To switch off the alarm:
• Press one of the remote control buttons
or, if you are sitting in the car, the or
buttons on one of the front doors.
Security 61
Overview of functions
Locking/arming Direction indicators flash once.
Unlocking/ Direction indicators flash twice.
disarming
Unlocking/ Direction indicators flash three times.
disarming trunk
lid
Alarm triggered Direction indicators flash for 5 min.
The horn sounds for 30-second intervals with
10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles) or until you
press one of the remote control buttons or turn
the remote control ON in the ignition switch.
Remote control Normal range: 5–16 yds. (5–15 metres).
In favorable conditions the range can be signifi-
cantly greater.
Remote control Normal life: approx. 4 years.
battery Change the battery when the SID displays:
Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.
See Changing the key battery, page 56.
Some car alarm functions and indications can be reprogrammed.
Contact a Saab dealer for details of the possibilities and refer to
page 309.
62 Security
Quick guide, LED and Saab Information Display
(SID) messages
Activity LED signal SID message Reason/action
Arming (delay period) Illuminates for 11 s. Key not accepted. Error when remote control
Contact Saab dealer. inserted into ignition switch.
Alarm armed Flashes once every 3 s.
Remote control battery Battery needs replacing.
Disarming Extinguishes. low. Replace battery. See page 56.
Alarm not armed Off. 2: standard key Check of the number of remote
A door, the hood or the tailgate is Flashes for 11 s then flashes Key No: 1 controls programmed for your
open or opened during the delay once every 3 s. car. See page 55.
period. Alarm has been triggered The alarm has been tripped
Car immobilized but not locked. Off. since being armed. since the car was last locked.
Change of status of immobilizer Double-flashes for 3 s. Immobilizer failure. Error when immobilizer code
system, valid remote control Try starting again. checked.
inserted or removed from ignition Contact Saab dealer.
switch.
9-3 Convertible 63
9-3 Convertible
Advice on soft top Rollover Pop-up Bars ___ 78

operation ___________ 64 Electric windows _______ 79
Operating the soft top __ 65 Interior lighting ________ 80
Raising the soft top Unlocking the trunk lid
manually ___________ 70 manually ____________ 81
SID warnings and Placing two golf bags
messages __________ 73 in the trunk __________ 82
"Easy entry"__________ 75
Head restraints _______ 76
Safety belts, rear seat,
Convertible _________ 77

64 9-3 Convertible
Advice on soft top • Roof racks and ski holders must not be
mounted on the soft top. WARNING
operation • On no account should anything be put into
the stowage space of the soft top (under • Never touch the hinges and struts of
• Once you have raised the soft top and the soft top cover) since this could cause the soft top nor the upper rail of the
before driving off, always check that the an obstruction when the soft top is being windshield while operating the soft
soft top is properly engaged with the wind- folded away. top.
shield rail. • Do not place any objects on the covers • Do not operate the soft top while there
• Once you have folded the soft top and over the roll bars as this can hamper their are bystanders close to the car.
before driving off, check that the soft top function.
cover is locked. • When operating the soft top, raise or fold
• Do not operate the soft top in tempera- it fully until notified that operation is
tures below 23°F (–5°C). complete by the SID. Do not leave the soft
• Note that certain automatic car washes top partially open/closed. If the soft top is
can damage the soft top. This applies to left in an intermediate position it will
car washes that use mechanical feelers collapse progressively after 20 seconds
bearing against the body. Saab advises to prevent overloading the drive system.
against washing the Convertible in an • Washing the soft top, see page 277.
automatic car wash.
• After rain or washing the car, allow the soft
top to dry completely before folding it.
Folding a wet or damp soft top can cause
water damage in the car and mildew to
form on the soft top.
9-3 Convertible 65
Operating the soft top Read the "Advice on soft top operation"
section on page 64 before operating the soft
top.
WARNING The soft top is operated with the switch on
the instrument panel. Hold the switch in the
• Do not touch the hinges or struts of the desired position until the soft top is fully
soft top during opening due to the folded or raised.
pinch hazard. The completion of folding or raising the soft
• Keep children out of reach. top is indicated by a chime.
Error messages that can appear on the SID
• Do not operate the soft top while there are shown on page 73.
are bystanders close to the car.
• Make sure that the soft top cover has
locked properly after folding the soft Switch for operating the soft top
top.
a Raising
• Check that the soft top engages prop-
erly with the upper edge of the wind- b Folding
shield after raising.
NOTICE
If you drive off while raising or folding the
soft top, operation is halted when
the speed of the car exceeds 20 mph
(30 km/h). This speed can be
programmed (0–20 mph/0–30 km/h). We
recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer. The movement of the car and
force of the wind can seriously damage
the components of the soft top system.
66 9-3 Convertible
Opening Remote opening 3
The following conditions must be fulfilled for You can fold the soft top when outside the
the soft top to be folded: car by pressing and holding the
• Vehicle speed must not exceed 20 mph (unlock) button on the remote control. See
(30 km/h). also page 129.
• Battery voltage must exceed 10 V.
• Outside temperature must exceed 23°F
(–5°C).
• The trunk lid must be locked.
• There must be sufficient space in the
trunk for the soft top.
Folding
1 Start the engine and let it idle. Clearance

for soft top operation: height, min. 7.2 ft
(2.2 m); behind car, min. 2" (5 cm).
2 Press and hold the soft top button until
the soft top is fully folded and the soft top
cover raised. Completed folding is indi-
cated by a chime. If there is a malfunc-
tion a text message will be shown on the
SID. Refer to page 73.
Do not press any of the buttons on the
same section of the instrument panel as
the soft top switch while folding the soft
top. This will cause the soft top to stop
and then sink after about 20 seconds.
If you continue to hold the button after the
chime, all the windows will open after a brief
delay.
9-3 Convertible 67
1 Rear window raised. Soft top storage in 3 Soft top folded. 4 The soft top cover is closed.
luggage compartment lowered.
2 The soft top cover is opened.
a 7.2 ft (2.2 m)
b 2" (5 cm)
68 9-3 Convertible
Raising securely to the upper edge of the wind-
The following conditions must be fulfilled for shield.
raising the soft top: If you hold the button pressed up after the
chime, all the windows will be closed after a
• Vehicle speed must not exceed short delay.
20 mph (30 km/h).
• Battery voltage must exceed 10 V.
• The trunk lid must be locked.
Raising
1 Start the engine and let it idle. Clearance

for soft top operation: height, min. 7.2 ft
(2.2 m); behind car, min. 2" (5 cm).
2 Press and hold the soft top button until
the soft top is fully raised and the soft top
cover closed. Completed raising is indi-
cated by a chime. If there is a malfunc-
tion a text message will be shown on the
SID. Refer to page 73.
Do not press any of the buttons on the
same section of the instrument panel as
the soft top switch while raising the soft
top. This will cause the soft top to stop
and then sink after about 20 seconds.
All side windows are opened slightly to pro-
tect the seals when the soft top is raised.
Check that the hooks in the soft top hold it
9-3 Convertible 69
1 The soft top cover is opened. 2 The soft top is raised. 3 The soft top cover is closed.
4 The rear window is lowered.
a 7.2 ft (2.2 m)
b 2" (5 cm
70 9-3 Convertible
Raising the soft top

manually
WARNING
Only raise the soft top manually in an
emergency (e.g. due to an electrical
fault).
Do not touch the soft top button on the
instrument panel while closing the soft top
manually. This could cause personal
injury and damage the soft top mecha-
nism.
Wire catch for unlocking soft top cover
Do not fold the soft top having closed it
manually. This can damage the soft top
mechanism.
1 Find the lug wrench, Allen key and
If the soft top has been folded mechanically screwdriver located under the luggage
there will be a delay of 20 seconds before it compartment floor. Tools under luggage compartment floor
is possible to raise it manually (the pressure 2 Remove the two covers from the side
must be released from the hydraulic sys- trim in the trunk, one from either side.
tem). If there are two of you, it is easiest if you
If the car is without electrical power, the stand on either side of the car and perform
trunk must be unlocked manually. Refer to steps 3-6 and 9-10 together.
page 81. 3 Unlock the soft top cover by pressing
forward the two wire catches, one on the
left and one on right-hand side.
9-3 Convertible 71
Soft top cover opened Manual closing started Soft top pulled towards windshield
4 Close the trunk lid fully as otherwise it 7 Before raising the soft top, the two
will obstruct the soft top cover. WARNING catches in the leading edge of the soft
5 Open the soft top cover, upward and top must be opened. Stand in the rear
backward. • Do not touch the hinges and struts of seat and pry off the cover with the screw-
6 Tip forward the front seat backrests. the soft top during raising. driver. Using the tool, turn clockwise to
open the catches.
• Keep your hands clear of the front Stand in the rear seat and raise the soft
windshield rail. top. Pull it towards the windshield. This
• Pinch hazard may cause personal operation requires 7.2 ft (2.2 m) of verti-
injury. cal clearance.
72 9-3 Convertible
Soft top locked to windshield rail Closing the soft top cover Rear window locked to soft top cover
8 Sit in one of the front seats and lock the 9 Lift up the rear window fully and hold it 11 Now lock the rear window to the soft top
soft top to the windshield rail. Use the lug there. Close the soft top cover. It is not cover. Sit in the rear seat and insert the
wrench and the Allen key. Turn roughly possible to lock the soft top cover after tool (the same tool as used to lock the
1/4 turn counterclockwise. Check that manual raising. soft top to the windshield rail) into the
the soft top is properly locked in place by hexagonal hole in the soft top mecha-
pressing up the front edge. The soft top nism. Turn roughly 1/4 turn, counter-
must not move upward. NOTICE clockwise on the right had side of the
To avoid damaging the paintwork on the soft top and clockwise on the left-hand
soft top cover and the trunk lid, take care side. Look at the soft top cover when
when closing the soft top cover. locking the rear window. The rear
window must make a tight seal against
the soft top cover.
10 Press down the rear edge of the soft top The soft top system must be checked and
as far as possible towards the soft top rectified without delay. We recommend that
cover. you contact a Saab dealer.
9-3 Convertible 73
SID warnings and messages
The following messages associated with the soft top system and can be displayed on the SID together with a chime:
Cause Suitable action

Soft top front not locked. Failure of the soft top to lock automatically to • Move the car so that it is standing level if on
Try again. the windshield. a steep slope.
• Press the soft top button to fold the soft top
slightly. Fold the soft top again.
Soft top power pack This message appears if the soft top is operated Wait 6 minutes to allow the hydraulic pump to
overheated. continuously for more than 3 minutes. cool down.
Allow to cool.
Open trunk. Move the object hindering soft top operation.
Move goods away from
top storage area.
Soft top may be Displayed if the soft top is folded at temperatures
damaged if operated below 23°F (–5°C).
at low temperature.
Only manual
operation possible.
Soft top cover not locked.
Try again.
74 9-3 Convertible
Battery low. The voltage of the car battery is too low to allow
soft top operation.
Soft top obstructed.
Clear obstacles and
try again.
Open/close soft top Complete soft top operation.
completely to open trunk.
Open/close soft top Complete soft top operation.

completely before driving
Close trunk. Close the trunk lid.
Driver seat unlocked. The backrest is not locked. Raise the backrest fully to locked position, see
page 75.
Passenger front seat The backrest is not locked. Raise the backrest fully to locked position, see
unlocked. page 75.
9-3 Convertible 75
"Easy entry"
WARNING
• Always check that the backrest locks
properly when returned to normal
position.
• Check that the fore-and-aft position of
the seat is properly locked. The back-
rest and the entire belt-in seat must be
locked in position; otherwise the occu-
pant of the seat is at risk of injury
during braking or in the event of a
crash, especially if a rear-facing child
seat is fitted behind the backrest.
To facilitate getting in and out of the rear "Easy entry" function. Illustration shows an electrically adjustable seat 3
seat, the front seats can be slid forward.
Manually adjusted passenger seats 3 Electrically adjustable front seats 3
1 Raise the handle by the head restraint 1 Raise the handle by the head restraint
on the seat. on the seat.
2 Tip the backrest and slide the seat 2 Tip the backrest forward.
forward. 3 The seat now moves to its foremost
Repositioning: position.
1 Tip back the backrest. Repositioning:
2 Slide the seat back to the desired 1 Tip the backrest back to its normal
position. position.
Make sure the backrest and seat are prop- 2 Raise and hold the handle until the seat
erly locked in position. has returned to its previous position.
76 9-3 Convertible
Head restraints
WARNING
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
head is optimally supported and the
center of the head restraint is at ear
height, thus reducing the likelihood of
neck injury in a crash.
• Raise the head restraints in the seats
that are occupied.
The front seats are equipped with Saab

Active Head Restraints (SAHRs). These are
designed to reduce the risk of neck injury if Front head restraint Rear head restraint
the car is hit from behind.
The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-
ated by body weight. The mechanism is built
into the top of the backrest, where it is con- The front and rear head restraints can be
nected to the head restraint. raised and lowered to a number of positions.
In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
forced back against the backrest. This, in • Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
turn, causes the mechanism to press the sides and pull it straight up.
head restraint forward and upward, thus lim- • Lowering: Press the head restraint
iting the backward movement of the head. forward and downward.
The rear head restraints can be fully low-
ered to improve rearward vision when the
rear seats are unoccupied.
9-3 Convertible 77
Safety belts, rear seat,
Convertible
The two rear seats have three-point safety
belts with inertia reels.
Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert-
ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
securely fastened.
Position the lap part low across the hips.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
possible. Safety belts, rear seat, Convertible
Press the red button on the belt buckle to
release the belt.
Refer to page 276 for how to check the func-
tion of the safety belts, cleaning, etc. WARNING
• If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it
must be properly secured with the
safety belt. This reduces the risk of the
cargo being thrown about during hard
braking or a crash, which could cause
personal injury.
• Check that the belt is not twisted or
lying against sharp edges.
• Make sure you use the correct seat-
belt buckle.
For how to secure loads on the rear seat,

refer to page 17.
78 9-3 Convertible
Rollover Pop-up Bars • Rollover Pop Up Bars deploy with

The Rollover Pop Up Bars, which are great force, and you could be injured if
located behind each rear seat head your arm or other body part, or if an
restraint, are designed to deploy in the object is covering the bars when they
event of a crash or rollover. deploy. Don't put anything on the
cover of the Rollover Pop Up Bars.
The path of the Rollover Pop Up Bars
WARNING must be kept clear.
You can be severely injured or killed in a • The Rollover Pop Up Bars are
crash if you are not wearing your safety designed to deploy only once. If they
belt - even if you have airbags and Roll- deploy, take your vehicle to a work-
over Pop Up Bars. Wearing your safety shop immediately to have the Rollover
belt during a crash helps reduce your Pop Up Bars repaired so that they
operate properly in the event of a Rollover Pop-up Bars
chance of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. crash or rollover. We recommend that
you contact a Saab dealer.
• The Rollover Pop Up Bars have
powerful springs that rapidly extend
the bars in rollover crashes, as well as
in moderate to severe crashes in NOTICE
which the airbags deploy. Rollover
Pop Up Bars are supplemental to the To avoid the risk of damage to the soft top
safety belts. They are designed to do not operated the soft top while the
work with safety belts but do not bars are extended.
replace them.
9-3 Convertible 79
Electric windows To close
Soft top raised – The windows are operated
individually.
WARNING Soft top folded – The button for the front
window closes both side windows.
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos- Automatic closing of a front side
ing the side windows. May cause serious window: Raise the button all the way and
or fatal injuries! release it. The rear side window must be
• Always remove the remote control fully closed. Pinch protection 3 is available
from the ignition switch when you for the front side windows.
leave the car to prevent personal For further information on the electric win-
injury caused by the activation of the dows, refer to page 129.
electric windows, for example, due to
children playing. Window switches Deactivating the passenger door
• The person operating the electric window button
window is responsible for ensuring
that no one, especially a child, has With the button on the driver’s door,
their head, hands or fingers in the you can deactivate the window button on
To open the passenger door.
window openings, before raising the
window. Soft top raised – The windows open individ- The illuminated switch will change color
ually. from green to amber (deactivated).
• Do not stick any part of the body or the Soft top folded – The button for the front
head out through an open window window opens both side windows.
while the car is moving.
Automatic opening: Press the button all
the way down and release it. If the soft top
is folded, the rear side window is also low-
ered.
80 9-3 Convertible
Calibrating front electric Interior lighting
windows with pinch protection 3
The interior lighting consists of a front roof
The window lifts should be calibrated if auto- light, two front reading lights, footwell light-
matic closing does not work or if the battery ing and courtesy lighting in the doors. The
has been disconnected. The pinch protec- light switches are located in the roof con-
tion will not work if the windows are not sole.
calibrated.
Perform calibration as follows: The cabin lighting comes on:
1 Make sure the soft top is raised. • When a door is opened and the ignition is
2 Make sure the doors are closed. OFF.
3 Let the engine idle. • When the remote control is removed from
4 Press and hold the soft top button up the ignition switch.
until a chime sounds. Front interior lighting - Convertible
During calibration, the four windows will The lighting goes out: 1 Left-hand reading light
be raised and lowered several times. 2 Cabin light
• When the car is locked. 3 Right-hand reading light
If calibration fails twice in a row, have the car
checked and rectified. We recommend that • When the ignition is turned on.
you contact a Saab dealer. • Approx. 20 s after closing all doors.
The lights are dimmed out gradually.
If a door is left open with the ignition OFF,
the interior lighting goes out automatically
after 5 min so as not to drain the battery.
The interior lighting can be switched off
completely.
1 Open the driver’s door.
2 Turn off the cabin lighting with the center
button, see illustration.
This is canceled when the ignition switch is
turned to position ON or when the car is
locked with the remote control.
9-3 Convertible 81
Glove box Unlocking the trunk lid
The glove box lighting comes on when the
compartment is opened and goes out when manually
it is closed. If the trunk lid is not unlocked by the central
For changing bulbs, refer to page 243. locking system, it can be unlocked
manually.
Sun visor 1 Take the traditional key out of the remote
An illuminated vanity mirror is provided on control by pressing the emblem on the
the inside of the sun visors. The lighting reverse (see page 56).
comes on when the cover is raised and goes 2 Carefully prise off the round cover using
out when it is closed. your nails, a credit card or similar so as
not to damage the paintwork.
Trunk lighting
3 Unlock the trunk lid using the traditional
The trunk lighting comes on and goes out key. Unlocking the trunk lid manually
when the trunk lid is opened and closed.
We recommend that you contact a Saab
If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be dealer to have the central locking system
switched off automatically after 20 min to checked.
prevent the battery from running flat.
For changing bulbs, refer to page 245.
82 9-3 Convertible
Placing two golf bags Spoiler on trunklid 3

in the trunk
WARNING
There is sufficient space in the trunk of the
Convertible for two golf bags. Proceed as Some models have a spoiler on the trunk-
follows. lid. Avoid getting fingers and hands
1 Start by inserting the narrow end of the trapped between the spoiler and rear
first bag to the right. fender when closing the trunklid.
2 Lie down the bag. Turn the bag so that it
lies on its widest side and slide it Wind deflector 3
forward, in under the soft top storage
(see illustration). A wind deflector is available as an acces-
sory. Follow the fitting instructions supplied
3 Put in the second bag in the same way with the wind deflector carefully.
as the first, but lie it on its narrow side Position of first golf bag
(see illustration). CargoWing 3
NOTICE
If play arises in any part of the
Position of second golf bag CargoWing, contact a workshop immedi-
ately to have this corrected. We recom-
mend that you contact a Saab dealer. If
such play is not eliminated, the
CargoWing may come loose while driv-
ing.
Instruments and controls
Warning and indicator

lights _______________ 84
Instruments ___________ 88
Information display,
main instrument panel _ 91
Saab Information Display
(SID)________________ 93
Switches _____________ 102
Wipers and washers ____ 106
Manual climate-control
system 3 ____________ 110
Automatic climate-
control system (ACC)__ 115

84 Instruments and controls

Main instrument panel (Arc panel shown) Warning and indicator
lights
The warnings and indications that can be
shown depend on the engine variant and
equipment level.
Antilock braking warning

This warning light illuminates when a fault
arises in the antilock brake system.
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
Antilock brake malfunction.

U.S. shown, Canada similar The brake system will continue to function
but without ABS modulation.
Main instrument panel
1 Tachometer 5 Engine temperature gauge
2 Speedometer 6 Information display Charge warning light
3 Turbo gauge 7 Trip meter reset button
4 Fuel gauge This light comes on when the battery is not
being charged by the alternator. If the light
comes on during driving, stop as soon as
possible and switch off the engine.
Check the drive belt, see page 229.

This light indicates a malfunction in the fuel
or ignition system. The car may still be
Warning, oil pressure Engine malfunction driven with care but the performance of the
(engine oil) (CHECK ENGINE) engine will be somewhat diminished (see
This light will come on if the engine oil pres- page 164).
sure is too low. If the warning light flashes or The following message is shown on the
comes on while you are driving, stop imme- WARNING Saab Information Display (SID):
diately in a safe place, switch off the engine
and check the oil level (see page 219). An illuminated “Engine malfunction Engine malfunction.
(CHECK ENGINE)” indicator light indi- Contact Saab dealer.
cates an engine-related problem. While
NOTICE your car may be able to be driven with the
“Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)” NOTICE
Never drive the car when the oil pressure indicator light illuminated (limp-home
warning lamp is on. Low oil pressure can mode), you are advised to have your car
cause serious engine damage. The car should be checked immediately
serviced at an authorized Saab dealer as at a Saab dealer to prevent more serious
soon as possible. faults from arising.
The following message is shown on the Continued driving without this problem
Saab Information Display (SID): being corrected might cause serious
Oil pressure low. further damage to your car and create
Make a safe stop. unsafe driving conditions. The operator
Turn off engine. should be prepared to take action if such
unsafe conditions arise (e.g. brake
smoothly, engage neutral, stop in a suita-
ble place, switch off the engine, etc.)

The following message is shown on the The brake system provides Electronic
Saab Information Display (SID): Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distrib-
utes the brake pressure between the front
High beam Indicator Brake fluid level low. and rear wheels, in such a way as to achieve
Make a safe stop. optimum braking performance irrespective
This light shows when the high beam is on Contact Saab dealer.
(see page 103). of the car’s load.
If a fault arises in the EBD function, the ,
WARNING and lights will come on. Also, the
Front fog lights 3 following message will appear on the Saab
• Never drive the car if these two lights Information Display (SID):
This light indicates when the front fog lights are on at the same time. Danger of
are on (see page 104). brake failure! Brake malfunction.
The front fog lights are switched off auto- Make a safe stop.
• If the level of brake fluid in the reser- Contact Saab dealer.
matically when the engine is switched off. voir is below the MIN mark, the vehicle
When the fog lights are next needed, they should be transported on a recovery If this is the case, drive carefully and contact
will have to be switched on manually. vehicle. a workshop as soon as possible. We recom-
mend that you contact a Saab dealer. Refer
• Have the brake system checked to Brake warning light on page 86, Antilock
immediately at a Saab dealer. braking warning on page 84 and ESP OFF
Brake warning light indicator on page 92.
This light should come on briefly when you For safety reasons, stop the car and check
turn the ignition key to ON. If it doesn´t come the level of the brake fluid (see page 224).
on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn If the level is normal, depress the brake
you if there is a problem. This light indicates pedal firmly two or three times. Now check
when the brake fluid level is too low (see the level again. If the level is still normal, you
page 224). may drive the car, with considerable cau-
tion, to the nearest workshop to have the
brake system checked. We recommend
that you contact a Saab dealer.

This light will come on for about four sec-
onds when the ignition switch is turned to
the Start or Drive position.
Safetybelt reminder Airbag warning light
This light reminds the driver to buckle up. This light comes on if a potentially serious
fault has occurred in the airbag system. Indicator, fuel
Parking brake warning The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID): This light comes on when there is less than
light about 2.5 gallons (10 litre) of fuel left in the
This light comes on when the parking brake Airbag malfunction. tank.
is applied (see page 187). Contact Saab dealer.
The parking brake is mechanical and oper- NOTICE
ates on the rear wheels.
If the car runs out of fuel, air can be drawn
WARNING in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
WARNING the catalytic converter to be damaged by
• If the airbag readiness light stays on overheating.
• Always apply the parking brake when after you start your vehicle, it means
parking, see page 187. the airbag system may not be working
properly. One or more of the following
• Always apply the parking brake conditions may occur:
before removing the remote control. - Non-deployment of the airbags in the
• Do not apply the parking brake while event of a crash.
the car is moving. - Deployment of the airbags without a
crash.
- Deployment of the airbags in crashes
less severe than intended.
• To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
Headlight and parking

light indicator
This light indicates that the headlights or
parking lights are on.
Cruise control indicator

light
This light comes on when the system is
engaged.
Automatic tire pressure

monitoring
Autochecking of lights, main Instruments
instrument panel
This light comes on if the air pressure in one The warning and indicator lights shown Tachometer
or several of the tires drops (see page 254. above should come on when the ignition
The tachometer displays the engine speed
switch is turned to ON. They should go out
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
after about 4 seconds once the engine has
started or after the fault-free self-diagnosis A protective function (interruption of the fuel
of each system or function. supply) limits the engine speed within the
red zone.

Reset button
The reset button is positioned immediately
to the left of the speedometer.
• Ignition ON:
Press once – resets the trip meter.
Cars with manual transmission
• Ignition OFF:
Press once – enables you to read the
odometer and trip meter.
Cars with automatic transmission

Speedometer
(U.S. speedometer shown)
Odometer and trip meter Cars sold in U.S.: The speedometer dis-
The odometer records the distance trav- plays the speed of the car in miles per hour
elled in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Cana- (mph).
dian vehicles the distance indicated is in Cars sold in Canada: The speedometer
kilometres, and the trip meter in miles and displays the speed of the car in kilometres
tenths (kilometres and tenths of kilometres per hour (km/h).
on Canadian vehicles). It receives information about vehicle speed
from the ABS’s wheel sensors.
NOTICE
If the needle, despite the above action,
enters the red zone, stop the car in a suit-
able place and allow the engine to idle. If
the needle continues to rise, switch off the
engine.
If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone,

stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so and
check the coolant level (see page 222).
WARNING
Temperature gauge Turbo gauge
Never open the cap of the expansion tank
The temperature gauge shows the temper- The turbo gauge indicates the air volume
completely when the engine is hot, open
ature of the coolant. The needle should be used for combustion, which is equivalent to
with care. The pressure in the cooling-
in the middle of the scale when the engine system can cause hot coolant and steam the engine load.
is at normal operating temperature. At low loads and when the engine is used for
to be released. Failure to heed this warn-
If the needle goes into the red zone (which ing may result in personal injury. braking, the needle will move within the
can occur at high outside air temperatures white zone.
or under heavy engine loads), choose the Under certain barometric conditions the
highest possible gear ratio and the lowest needle may enter the first part of the red
possible engine speed, and avoid shifting zone without necessarily indicating that a
down. fault has arisen.

If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone
and the engine at the same time loses
Information display,
power, because the monitoring system is main instrument panel
limiting the boost pressure, you should
contact a Saab dealer as soon as possible. Under the speedometer is a display. The
information shown here varies depending
When the speed of the car exceeds on whether the car has a manual transmis-
143 mph (230 km/h), acceleration is limited sion or automatic transmission.
by reducing the boost pressure. The pres-
sure gauge then moves towards the middle Cars with manual transmission:
of the white field, indicating a drop in engine
power and consequently the car’s speed.
Fuel gauge • The odometer reading is shown on the

When less than about 2.5 gallons (10 litre) left-hand side of the display.
of fuel is left in the tank, a warning light on • Various information and faults are
the main instrument panel comes on. displayed in the center of the display.
Refueling, see page 167. • The trip meter reading is shown on the
right-hand side of the display.

Cars with automatic
transmission:
ESP indicator ESP OFF indicator
This symbol lights up when the system is
operative.
Operation of the ESP indicates reduced
WARNING
cohesion between the tires and the road,
• The odometer and trip meter readings are The system improves ride comfort and
and that extra care should be taken by the
shown on the left-hand side of the display. safety during normal driving. It must
driver.
• Various information and faults are however not be regarded as a system
displayed in the center of the display. to enable the driver to maintain higher
• The selected gear position is shown on speeds. The same precautions as
the right-hand side of the display. normal for safe cornering and driving
on slippery roads must be adopted (see
pages 183/ 185).
Information symbol.
Read information on SID
This symbol lights up when the system is
This symbol comes on when a message or disengaged using the ESP button.
warning is displayed on the Saab Informa- If there is a malfunction, the symbol cannot
tion Display (SID). be turned off by pressing the ESP button.
The following message is shown on the
Gear selector indicator Saab Information Display (SID):
(cars with automatic trans-
mission) Stability control failure.
The current gear position is displayed on the
right-hand side of the information display.
If so, have the system checked at a Saab
When gears are selected manually, the dealer.
letter M (manual) and the selected gear are
displayed (see page 178). See also Electronic Stability Program
(ESP) 3 on page 185.

Saab Information Profiler
Adjustments can be made with the control
Display (SID) unit situated between the main instrument
Various types of information are shown on panel and the audio system. This is called
the SID: warnings, indications, trip com- Profiler.
puter information and information from the 1 Activate Profiler by pressing the
car’s Infotainment System. CUSTOMIZE button.
The warnings and indications that can be 2 Turn the INFO dial until the appropriate
shown on the SID are listed on page 310. system is selected.
When the engine is switched off, the current 3 Confirm selection by pressing the
warnings and indications are displayed. INFO dial.
If there is more than one message on the Select Exit once you have made the desired
SID, a plus sign will be displayed to the left settings.
of the first message. Each message will be SID, control unit and display
displayed for 10 seconds.
Press the CLEAR button to acknowledge
a SID message. If you acknowledge a mes-
sage but do nothing about it, the message
will be displayed again the next time you
start the car.
When the engine is switched off the warn-
ing/indicator lights still active are displayed,
this is to remind the driver. At this point the
warning/indicator lights previously acknowl-
edged with the CLEAR button are also dis-
played.
You can adjust the settings of several of the
car’s systems, such as the clock, alarm and
climate control system. These are known as
Profiler.

The number of systems that are displayed Climate System, page 124. Trip computer function of the SID
on the SID depends on the car’s equipment
level. The list shown below includes the Rear Defroster
systems that can be found in your car. WARNING
Heated Seats
Park Assistance, page 192. Fan Settings It is strongly recommended that the SID
SPA on settings be changed only when the car is
Air Distribution stationary. The driver’s attention can
SPA off A/C Mode otherwise easily be distracted from the
road.
Clock / Alarm, page 98. Dual/Single Zone
Set Clock Default Settings SID contains the following functions:
Set Alarm 08:30 System Settings, page 100. Temp Outdoor temperature
Rain Sensor, page 107. Language D.T.E. Estimated range (distance to
High Unit empty fuel tank).
When the possible range is
Medium Speed Scale Illum. less than 18 miles (30 km)
Low Service Info then the text Refill fuel now is
displayed.
Fuel Ø Average fuel consumption
since function last reset
Date Date
Dist Distance to destinations.
Function can also be used as
a trip meter
Arriv Estimated time of arrival
Speed Ø Average speed since function
last reset
Speed W Speed warning (chime)

When the engine is started, the function that Setting values Resetting a single function
was selected when the engine was 1 Select one of the functions using the 1 Select the function you wish to reset with
switched off is displayed, with the following INFO dial. the INFO dial.
exceptions:
• Speed W (preset to 55 mph (90 km/h) • Fuel Ø
• Temp is displayed if the outside tempera- • Dist (preset to 100 miles (100 km) if not • Speed Ø
ture is between 26 and 38°F (–3 and previously set) • Trip (Dist used as trip meter)
+3°C). • Speed Ø 2 Press and hold the CLEAR button for
• D.T.E is displayed if less than or equal to • Arriv approx. 1 second.
30 miles (50 km).
2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given The selected function will now be reset.
Outdoor temperature audible confirmation.
3 Turn the INFO dial to change the value. Resetting the trip computer
(Press CLEAR to reset the value.) 1 Select one of the functions using the
WARNING 4 Press the INFO dial to finish setup. INFO dial.
• Fuel Ø
Remember that roads can be icy even at Using DIST as a trip meter
temperatures of above 38°F (+3°C), • Speed Ø
especially on bridges and stretches of 1 Select Dist using the INFO dial. • D.T.E.
road that are sheltered from the sun. 2 Press and hold the CLEAR button for • Arriv
approx. 1 second. • Trip (Dist used as trip meter)
The Temp function is always activated An arrow will now appear on the right-hand 2 Press and hold the CLEAR button
(even in NIGHTPANEL mode) if the outdoor side of the display, indicating that the trip (approx. 3 seconds) until audible confir-
temperature rises or falls to between 26 and meter is running. mation is given.
38°F (–3 and +3°C).
If the temperature sensor, located under the
front bumper, is covered by snow or ice,
temperature readings will be unreliable.
For how to set the year, month and day,
refer to Clock on page 98.

Speed warning Calculating the arrival time Calculating the arrival time if a specified
This value is preset to 55 mph (90 km/h). (When will I arrive if I know how far I have to average speed is maintained
The value can be set to between 0 and drive?) (When will I arrive if I know how far I have to
150 mph (0 and 250 km/h). This function should be used before starting drive and know what my average speed will
1 Select Speed W using the INFO dial. out a journey. be?)
2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given To calculate the arrival time, the distance This function should be used before starting
audible confirmation. must first be given. out a journey.
3 Adjust the speed using the INFO dial. 1 Select the Dist function using the First, set the distance under Dist.
4 Confirm the setting by pressing the INFO dial. 1 Then use the INFO dial to select the
INFO dial. 2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given Speed Ø function.
A star on the right-hand side of the display audible confirmation. 2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
indicates when the speed warning function 3 Set the distance to the destination using audible confirmation.
is active. the INFO dial. 3 Turn the INFO dial to set the estimated
An audible alarm will sound if the set speed 4 Press the INFO dial to finish setup. average speed.
is exceeded. Select Arriv during the journey to display 4 Press the INFO dial to finish setup.
Disengage the function with the CLEAR the arrival time based on the average speed The time of arrival is updated during the
button. Re-engage the function using since Dist was set. If you take a break, this journey based on the average speed since
the INFO dial. time will be added to the previously calcu- Dist was set. The speed of the car must
lated arrival time. exceed 12 mph (20 km/h).
Similarly, you can check the distance left by By selecting Dist during the journey, you
selecting Dist. can see how much distance is left to travel.
After the distance to destination has When Dist reaches zero it acts as a trip
decreased to zero, Dist will function as a trip meter. The tip meter starts from the distance
meter (see Using DIST as a trip meter). The that was set previously.
starting value for the trip meter will be the
last distance set for the Dist function.
Example: The Dist function is set to
100 miles. After the count-down has
reached 0 miles, Dist will act as a trip meter
beginning at 100 miles.

Calculating the requisite average speed Setting the date NIGHTPANEL
(What average speed do I need to maintain 1 Select the Date function using the To improve night-driving conditions inside
to get to my destination in time?) INFO dial. the car, the Night Panel mode can be
This function should be used before starting 2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given selected. In this mode, the amount of infor-
out a journey. audible confirmation. mation displayed is reduced, and only the
To calculate the requisite average speed, most important instruments and displays
3 Turn the INFO dial to set the year.
the distance must first be given. will be illuminated.
4 Press the INFO dial.
First, set the distance under Dist. When the NIGHTPANEL button is pressed,
5 Turn the INFO dial to set the month. only the speedometer will be illuminated.
1 Then use the INFO dial to select the 6 Press the INFO dial. All other instrument lighting will be switched
Arriv function. 7 Turn the INFO dial to set the day. off and the needles drop to zero.
2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given 8 Confirm the setting by pressing the Note: All indicator and warning lights and
audible confirmation. INFO dial. messages will operate normally if required.
3 Turn the INFO dial to set the estimated
Temp (when the outside temperature falls
time of arrival.
or rises to between 26 and 38°F (–3 and
4 Press the INFO dial to finish setup. +3°C)) and D.T.E. (when the remaining fuel
The average speed (Speed Ø) will be is only sufficient for approx. 80 miles
shown for 10 seconds. (50 km) of driving) are even shown in Night
This average speed will be updated during Panel model.
the journey.

Under Profiler you can choose whether the Clock
entire speedometer scale (0–160 mph) or Clock / Alarm
Settings can be made from Profiler.
only part of the scale (0–90 mph) should be Set Clock
illuminated in NIGHTPANEL mode. 1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
Profiler. RDS Adjust
1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
Profiler. 2 Select Clock / Alarm using the INFO dial.
Manual
2 Select System Settings using the INFO 3 Press in the INFO dial.
dial. 4 Select Set Clock. Clock
11:30
3 Press in the INFO dial. 5 Select Manual.
4 Select Speed Scale Illum. Select Manual to set the time, year, month Year
and day. 2003
Select 0–160 mph or 0–90 mph.
Month
System Settings Manual setting: Dec
Speed Scale Illum. 1 Turn the INFO dial to change the value.
Day
2 Press the INFO dial once after each 1 Mon
0–160 mph setting (time, year, month and day) to
0–90 mph confirm the value.
Once you have selected the day, press the When the remote control is not in the ignition
INFO dial to finish setting and update the switch, you can illuminate the clock for
clock. 5 seconds by pressing the INFO dial.
Press the CLEAR button once to go back a
step when setting the time, year, month and
day manually.
Press the CUSTOMIZE button to cancel
setting.
RDS setting: The time, year, month and
day can also be set from the RDS signal
(from RDS Adjust) provided that the RDS
signal from the current station contains this
information. This may vary between differ-
ent radio stations and different countries.

Explanation of setting the clock. Alarm Explanation of setting the alarm time.
Set Clock Settings can be made from Profiler. Set Alarm 08:30
RDS Adjust: Profiler. Set Alarm 08:30:
In order to use this function, 2 Select Clock / Alarm using the INFO dial. A new alarm time can be set.
the car's radio must be 3 Press in the INFO dial. Use the INFO dial.
tuned to a FM station known 4 Select Set Alarm 08:30.
to transmit a time signal. Set Alarm 08:30 on:
If the alarm is not activated: set using the
Saab has no control over INFO dial. A preset alarm time exists.
the level of RBDS informa- If the alarm is activated (Set Alarm 08:30 Select Alarm on or Alarm off.
tion, or the content, being on): select Alarm on or Alarm off.
transmitted by radio sta-
tions. Clock / Alarm
Set the year, month and day
under Manual if the current Set Alarm 08:30
radio station does not trans- Alarm
mit this information. 09:40
Manual: Set Alarm 08:30 on
Use the INFO dial to set Alarm on
time, year, month and day
manually. Alarm off

System Settings System Settings Service Info
Under this heading you can make system
settings, such as change the display lan- Language Service Data
guage, units and service information. (The number of languages can vary Oil quality: xxx %.
between markets.) xxxx days to service.
Profiler. English Service Type
2 Select System Settings using the French
INFO dial. Time for service.
3 Press in the INFO dial. German Time for intermediate
4 Select the desired heading using the Italian service.
INFO dial.
Spanish Time for main and
5 Press in the INFO dial. intermediate service.
Swedish
Time for main service
Unit
Reset Service Ind.
Metric
Are you sure?
Imperial Yes No
US
Speed Scale Illum.
0–160 mph
0–90 mph

Explanation of the various selections under Service Info Resetting the service indication
System Settings. Reset the service indication in accordance
Service Data: with the following:
Language
Displayed here are the number of 1 Turn the remote control to the ON posi-
Select the desired language. The days to the next intermediate serv- tion, the engine must be switched off.
number of languages can vary ice. Also displayed here is a per- 2 Press the CUSTOMIZE button.
between markets. centage approximately equivalent 3 Select System Settings using the INFO
Unit to the condition of the engine oil. dial. Press in the INFO dial.
100% is equivalent to new engine
Select the desired group of units. oil. 4 Select Service Info. Press in the INFO
The day counter and percentage dial.
Speed Scale Illum. for the engine oil can activate the 5 Select Reset Service Ind. Press in the
Select the proportion of the speedo- service indication independently of INFO dial.
meter to be illuminated in NIGHT- each other. 6 When ased Are you sure?
PANEL mode. Service Type: select Yes.
The type of service that is required

is shown here.
Reset Service Ind.:
A service indication must only be
reset after the service has been
performed.
Switches Headlight levelling 3

Cars with xenon headlights are equipped
with an automatic headlight levelling sys-
Daytime Running Lights tem, which self-calibrates each time the
vehicle is started.
The parking lights and daytime running If a fault arises in the automatic headlight
lights come on automatically when the igni- levelling system, the headlights will be
tion switch is in the ON position. angled down to avoid dazzling drivers in
High beam can not be activated in this posi- oncoming traffic. Adjust your speed accord-
tion but headlight flasher can. ingly as the range of the headlights will be
reduced. Check fuse 20 in the engine bay
fuse box (see page 252).
Parking lights A fault in the system will produce the follow-
The parking lights can be turned on irre- Light switches ing message on the Saab Information Dis-
spective of the position of the ignition play (SID):
switch. If the parking lights are on and the Headlight levelling
driver’s door is opened, a reminder to turn malfunction.
them off will sound. Contact Saab dealer.
Do not use the parking lights alone while
driving. Special equipment is required for adjusting
The parking lights may be used in combina- the basic headlight alignment.
tion with the front fog lights (see page 104).
Headlights
Low beam headlights are turned on when
the ignition switch is turned to ON and
turned off when the switch is turned back to
LOCK.

Courtesy Headlamp Feature
A delay function allows the low beam head-
lights and back-up lights to remain on for
about 30 seconds after the driver’s door has
been closed.
To activate this function:
1 After turning off the engine, remove the
remote control.
2 Open the driver’s door.
3 Pull the control stalk all the way towards
the steering wheel.
The low beam headlights and reversing
Dipswitch lights will come on and remain on for Adjusting instrument illumination
1 Headlight flasher 30 seconds when the door is closed.
2 High/low beam
Instrument lighting
High/low beam The brightness of the instrument lighting
To switch between high and low beam, pull can be adjusted by pressing the button (+ or
the control stalk all the way towards the - signs on the button above the NIGHT-
steering wheel. (Headlight switch must be PANEL button).
ON.)
The symbol on the main instrument
panel shows when the high beam is on.
Headlight flasher
To flash your headlights, pull the control
stalk half-way towards the steering wheel.
The high beam will remain on until you
release the stalk.
Front fog light switch Rear fog light switch Turn signal & lane change indicators
1 Right
2 Left
Front fog lights 3 Rear fog light
The front fog lights should be used in poor To turn on the rear fog light, press the rear
visibility. fog light button on the instrument panel. The Turn signal & lane change
These are automatically turned off when the headlights or front fog lights must be on. indicators
engine is switched off. When the car is next The rear fog light is automatically turned off The stalk switch has an intermediate,
started, the fog lights will have to be when the engine is switched off. When the spring-loaded position that is useful for sig-
switched back on manually by pressing the car is next started, the rear fog light will have nalling when changing lanes or passing.
fog light switch. If the engine is restarted to be switched back on manually by press- The stalk switch also has fixed positions for
within 30 seconds, the front fog lights will ing the rear fog light switch. If the engine is indicating a right or left turn, that are can-
remain on. restarted within 30 seconds, the rear fog celled automatically when the steering
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi- light will remain on. wheel is centered.
sions governing the use of front fog Acquaint yourself with the legal provi- If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency
lights. sions governing the use of rear fog light. with which the indicators flash will be
doubled.
This frequency is also doubled if a trailer is
being towed and one of its indicator bulbs
breaks.
WARNING
Switch on the hazard flashers if the car
has to be left at the roadside on account
of a crash, engine trouble or a flat tire.
If you carry a warning triangle or flares,
they should be set up along the side of the
road 50–110 yds. (50–100 metres)
behind your vehicle. If the car is not
clearly visible (e.g. over the brow of a hill
or bridge), place the triangle/flare even
further back.
Hazard warning light switch
Back-Up Button for accessory 3
The back-up lights come on automatically This button can be used for accessories,
when reverse gear is engaged or selected such as extra lights.
Hazard warning lights with the ignition switched on.
The button for the hazard warning lights is
located on the climate control panel.
When the button is pressed, all the direction
indicators and the symbol in the button flash
simultaneously.
If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency
with which the indicators flash will be
doubled.
Hazard warning lights should only be used
if, because of an accident or breakdown, the
car constitutes a hazard to other road users.

Priority of audible information Wipers and washers
Sound from various functions in the car,
such as the direction indicators, parking Windshield wipers
assistance and seatbelt reminders, come
from the same sound source: the car’s Position 1 is a spring-loaded position that
sound system. If two or more of these func- will produce a single sweep of the wipers.
tions are active simultaneously, the most In position 2 you can set the delay period for
important function at that time will be priori- intermittent wiping using the thumbwheel on
tized. the stalk switch. There are 5 delay periods
from which to choose, ranging from 2 to
If, for example, the direction indicators are
15 seconds.
active when you engage reverse, the park-
ing assistance (if fitted) will be heard instead The wipers always return to their home posi-
of the direction indicators. When reverse is tion when the ignition is turned off.
disengaged, the direction indicators will be To leave the wipers positioned vertically on
the windshield, proceed as follows: Windshield wipers
heard, if they are still active. 0 OFF
1 Switch off the engine and remove the 1 Single sweep
remote control. 2 Intermittent wiping
3 Low speed
2 Activate the wipers within the next 4 High speed
16 seconds by pressing the stalk switch 5 Windshield and headlight washing 3
down.
When the ignition is next switched on the
wipers will return to their home position.
Changing wipers blades, see page 230. Washers
Activate the washers by pulling the stalk
switch towards the steering wheel.
When the washers are operated, the wipers
will make 3, 4 or 5 sweeps, depending on
how long the washers were kept on. If
the speed of the car is less than 12 mph
(20 km/h), the wipers will make an addi-
tional sweep after roughly 8 seconds.
When the washer fluid level drops below
1 quart (1 litre), the headlight washers (if
equipped) are deactivated. This is in order

Rain sensor 3
WARNING
Turn the rain sensor off if the ignition is
ON to avoid personal injury when clearing
snow and ice from the windshield.
NOTICE
Turn the rain sensor off before washing
Control for setting wiper delay Windshield wipers with rain sensor the car in an automatic carwash, to avoid
0 OFF damaging the windshield wipers.
1 Single sweep
to prioritize the windshield. The following 2 AUTO - rain sensor engaged
message is displayed on the SID: 3 Low speed The rain sensor automatically controls the
4 High speed windshield wipers. The sensor is located on
Washer fluid level low. 5 Windshield and headlight washing 3 the windshield beside the rearview mirror.
Refill. The system varies the frequency of wiping
between single sweeps and continuous
To prevent the smell of washer fluid from wiping, depending on the amount of pre-
entering the car, recirculation can be acti- Headlight washers 3 cipitation.
vated automatically while the windshield is The headlights are washed at the same time Activate the rain sensor by lifting the stalk
washed. The recirculation symbol will how- as the windshield if the headlights are on. switch to the AUTO position. The wipers
ever not light up. This function is optional; The headlights are washed every fifth time make one sweep for reference to see how
contact a workshop. We recommend that the windshield washers are used or if two much water is on the windshield. In the
you contact a Saab dealer. This automatic (2) minutes have elapsed since the wind- future, the sensor compares the amount of
recirculation is the factory default setting as shield was last washed. water on the windshield with this reference
long as the system is working in full "AUTO" The headlight washers are not activated at value.
mode with no customized settings. speeds in excess of 125 mph (200 km/h).

If the stalk switch is left in the AUTO position Adjusting sensitivity Explanation of sensor sensitivity.
when the engine is switched off, when the The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be
engine is next started it must first be moved adjusted under Profiler. If you increase the High
to the 0 or 3 position and then back to AUTO sensitivity, the wipers will make one sweep The sensor is set to high sensitivity.
to reactivate the sensor. for reference. The wipers start when there is only
If the system malfunctions, the wipers will 1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to a small amount of water on
operate at low speed when the stalk switch Profiler. the windshield.
is set to the AUTO position.
2 Select Rain Sensor using the INFO dial. Medium
3 Press in the INFO dial.
The sensor is set to normal sensitivity.
4 Select the sensitivity by turning the dial. This is one of the Default Settings.
5 Confirm this selection by pressing the
INFO dial. Low
The sensor is set to low sensitivity (wip-
Rain Sensor ers operate only with a large amount of
High water on the windshield, i.e., down-
pour).
Medium
Low
The sensitivity of the sensor is also affected

by the amount of daylight. The sensor is
somewhat more sensitive at night. This
adjustment is automatic.

Rear window wiper, SportCombi
To obtain:
• a single sweep: move the control to
position 2, the control springs back to the
home position.
• intermittent wiping, 6 s: move the control
to position 2.
If the windscreen wipers are activated
then the rear window wiper will automati-
cally changeover to intermittent wiping
when reverse gear is engaged and the
engine is running.
• washing and wiping: move the control to
position 3.
The control returns to the home position.
The wiper makes 3 sweeps after the
washing has finished. If the speed of the
car is below 40 km/h when the washing
has finished the wiper makes an extra
sweep after 5 s to wipe off any washer
fluid residue.
The wiper always returns to the home posi-
tion when the ignition is turned off.
The washer jet is not adjustable.
Changing wiper blade, see page 230.
1 litre, the rear window washer is deacti-
vated. This is in order to prioritise the wind-
screen. The following message is displayed
on the SID:
Washer fluid level low.

Refill.
Manual climate-control
system 3
Fresh air for the cabin is drawn in through an
inlet grille at the bottom edge of the wind-
shield. It passes through a filter before
reaching the climate control system and
delivery into the cabin. The air is evacuated
via openings in the parcel shelf. It is then led
through outlets on either side of the car
behind the rear bumper.
The incoming air is treated in three stages:
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu-
midified and cooled; and finally, if required,
it is heated.
To optimize the performance of the A/C sys-
tem, all windows and the sunroof should be Control panel: manual climate control 6 Rear window/door mirror heating
shut. 1 Temperature 7 Hazard warning lights
To reduce potential misting on the insides of 2 Fan speed 8 Air conditioning (A/C)
3 Air distribution 9 Seat heating, front left seat
the windows, the glass should be cleaned 4 Seat heating, front right seat
with a quality glass cleaner. How often this 5 Recirculation
will need to be done depends on how clean
the air is - if there are smokers in the car, the Temperature control
windows will need to be cleaned more fre- The temperature of the incoming air can
quently. Fan
be infinitely varied using the temperature
The output of air is controlled by the fan control.
speed.

Air distribution Recommended settings in severe cold
The air distribution control is used to direct the flow of air to the On starting with a cold engine, set the fan speed to 2 or 3 and select
defroster, panel and floor vents. maximum heat and defroster to heat the cabin and demist the wind-
The control also permits settings in between the three main settings shield as quickly as possible.
defroster, panel and floor: When the engine is warmer and the temperature gauge starts to
rise, fan setting 4 may be chosen. Once the windshield is clear, the
• defroster and floor air distribution control should be turned to .
• panel and floor If the rear seat passengers desire more warmth to the feet, turn the
distribution knob one step clockwise.
• defroster, panel and floor (11 o’clock position)
How quickly the engine warms up will depend on how the car is
To counter cold drafts from the front side windows when the control driven. It will take longer for the engine to warm up if the car is driven
has been set to defroster or floor, a small flow of air issues from in a high gear at low engine speeds, such as in town, than if it is
the outer vents on the fascia. driven at high engine speeds on a highway, for example.
As the winter comfort setting, we recommend that the distribution Do not use fan speed 5. This is primarily intended for rapid cooling
knob be turned to . during the summer. Using it in cold weather will delay the engine
warm-up time and providing heat to the passenger compartment.
Settings
for various
weather
conditions
Defroster Winter – defroster
Panel Winter – comfort setting
Summer – overcast
Floor
Summer – sunny
Defroster, panel and floor

Condensation water
When the A/C compressor is on, the incom-
Air conditioning (A/C) ing air is dehumidified. The resulting con-
The air conditioning is combined with the densation water is drained away through an
conventional climate control system and outlet under the car.
is switched on by pressing the but- It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
ton, provided that the fan control is in be seen dripping from this outlet when the
position 1-5. car is parked. The warmer the ambient air
The incoming air is treated in three stages: and the higher the humidity, the more con-
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu- densation will form.
midified and cooled; and finally, if required,
it is heated.
Recirculation
If the engine coolant gets too hot, the A/C
Panel vent compressor will be turned off. When the button is pressed, the reg-
Convertible: When the soft top or all the ular air intake will be closed. In this mode,
windows are open in a hot, humid climate, it the air inside the cabin is recirculated.
Air vents is recommended to switch off the air condi- Use recirculation when you wish for rapid
The air vents swivel universally, so that air tioning to save fuel. Also, if the air condition- cooling at very high outside temperatures.
can be directed as desired. In winter, for ing is on, condensation may form on cold Switch the air conditioning (A/C) on first.
instance, the outer vents can be directed surfaces such as the floor air ducts. If necessary, recirculation can be switched
onto the door windows for enhanced on manually to avoid unpleasant air from
demisting. entering the car.
The amount of air can be individually con- Only use recirculation for a short period
trolled by the regulator on each vent. If you of time at temperatures lower than 50°F
wish to reduce the airflow, start by half- (+10°C), such as to avoid unpleasant air.
shutting the vent in question. Mist or ice may otherwise form on the
windows.
Electrically heated rear Electric heating, front

window/external mirrors seats 3
This button is located under the fan speed The seat cushions and backrests of the front
control. seats are heated.
Always switch off the heating as soon as the The heating is thermostatically controlled
rear window is free from ice and mist. It will and set at approx. 104°F (40°C).
be turned off automatically after 12 minutes. Switch off the seat heating once the seat is
Refrain from placing sharp objects on the warm.
parcel shelf, to avoid damaging the heating
element.
Convertible: The rear window heating is
not turned on if the soft top is folded down.

Automatic climate-
control system (ACC)
Fresh air for the cabin is drawn in through an
inlet at the bottom edge of the windshield. It
passes through an effective filter before
reaching the climate control system and
delivery into the cabin. The air is evacuated
via openings in the parcel shelf. It is then led
through outlets on either side of the car
behind the rear bumper.
The Automatic Climate-Control system
(ACC) automatically maintains the desired
cabin temperature, regardless of the
weather outside.
The system will achieve the desired temper-
ature in the quickest possible way. ACC panel 10 Manual increase of fan speed
Note that heating or cooling is not 1 Temperature setting: left-hand side 11 Hazard warning lights
speeded up by setting the temperature 2 Manual setting of air distribution 12 Manual decrease of fan speed
3 Recirculation 13 Seat heating, front left seat
higher or lower than the final tempera- 4 AUTO (automatic regulation)
ture you desire. 5 A/C
To optimize the performance of the air con- 6 Defroster
ditioning system, all windows and the sun- 7 Rear window heating
8 Temperature setting: right-hand side
roof should be shut. The air vents in the 9 Seat heating, front right seat
fascia must be open.
The incoming air is treated in three stages: To reduce potential misting on the insides of
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu- the windows, the glass should be cleaned
midified and cooled; and finally, if required, with a quality glass cleaner. How often this
it is heated. will need to be done depends on how clean
the air is - if there are smokers in the car, the
windows will need to be cleaned more
frequently.

Temperature control The displayed temperature is not the actual
The cabin is divided into two temperature air temperature but corresponds to the
zones: comfort level normally experienced at that
temperature after allowance has been
1 Driver’s zone. made for the airflow, relative humidity, solar
2 Passenger zone. radiation, and so on, currently prevailing
The temperature in the rear seat will be a inside the car.
mixture of the two zones. • The most usual temperature setting is
If you choose the single zone setting, the between 66–74°F (19–23°C), depending
entire cabin is treated as one zone. If you on personal preference and what clothing
choose the dual zone setting, settings can is worn.
be made separately for the driver’s zone • Change the temperature setting in 2°F
and passenger zone. (1°C) steps.
Select between single and dual zone set- • Make sure the air vents are open when Panel vent
tings under Profiler (see page 124). cooling the cabin in warm weather.
The cabin temperature can be set to
between 58–82°F (15–27°C). In addition, HI
(maximum heating and high fan speed) and Settings when HI is selected: Air vents
LO (maximum cooling and maximum fan • Maximum heat The air vents swivel universally, so that air
speed) can be selected. HI and LO can only can be directed as desired. In winter, for
• Air distribution to windshield and floor instance, the outer vents can be directed
be selected for the passenger zone if the
driver has selected the same setting. • High fan speed (6 bars on the fan display). onto the door windows for enhanced
demisting.
Settings when LO is selected: The amount of air can be individually con-
trolled by the regulator on each vent. If you
• Maximum cooling wish to reduce the airflow, start by half-
• Air distribution to air vents in fascia shutting the vent in question.
• Maximum fan speed (8 bars on the fan Certain variants have an air vent on the rear
display). of the floor console.
• Recirculation ON (depending on outside
temperature).

The system uses four sensors:
• Outside air temperature sensor
• Cabin air temperature sensor
• Sun sensor
• Blended air temperature sensors (located
in the heater unit and the outer panel vent
duct).
The sun sensor is located centrally on the
top of the fascia.
Note:
If the sun sensor is covered, the ACC
system will not be able to regulate the cabin
climate as intended, especially in strong
sunshine.
Condensation water
When the A/C compressor is on, the incom-
ing air is dehumidified. The resulting con-
densation water is drained away through an
outlet under the car.
It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
be seen dripping from this outlet when the
car is parked. The warmer the ambient air
and the higher the humidity, the more con-
densation will form. Sun- and cabin sensor, Sport Sedan Sun- and cabin sensor, Convertible
1 Sun sensor 1 Sun sensor
2 Cabin temperature sensor 2 Cabin temperature sensor

Functions
Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings.
If a manual function is selected, it will be locked in but other functions
will be controlled automatically. The A/C compressor must be turned on and off
The selected temperature is always maintained automatically. manually with the AC button.
The compressor can only be turned on or off while
the engine is running.
This function has two modes:
Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and recir- • AC – The system cools and dehumidifies the
culation will be controlled automatically. incoming air. This symbol is not shown in the
In falling temperatures the A/C compressor is display.
switched off at approx. 32°F (0 °C). • AC-OFF – The A/C compressor is switched off.
In rising temperatures the A/C compressor is The incoming air is not cooled or dehumidified.
switched on at approx. 40°F (+5 °C). See also Profiler on page 124.
If, when starting the car, the outside air temperature
is between 32°F and 40°F (0 and +5 °C), the A/C
compressor is switched on.
Pressing AUTO once will cancel all previous manual
air distribution selections.
When the engine is started, the ACC system will be
in AUTO mode, provided that no air distribution set-
tings are programmed under Profiler (see
page 124).

When the system is switched OFF:
• The fan and A/C compressor are switched off.
To turn the system OFF, press and hold (or press • The temperature control is set to 0 % heat.
repeatedly) the button to reduce the fan speed until • The current air distribution setting is retained.
the fan is switched off. Then release the button and • Recirculation can be selected.
press it once more.
The A/C compressor will now be disengaged. To re-
engage the A/C, press one of the following buttons:
• The A/C compressor will be
switched on if it was previously
engaged, and the air distribution The rear window and door mirror heating can be
and fan speed will switch to AUTO. controlled manually or automatically (refer to
• Higher fan speed Profiler).
The A/C compressor will be Switch off the rear window and door mirror heating
switched on if it was previously as soon as the glass is clear. The heating will be
engaged, the air distribution will return to its previ- turned off automatically after 12 minutes.
ous setting and fan speed will increase. Refrain from placing sharp objects on the parcel
shelf, to avoid damaging the heating element.
• Defroster
The A/C compressor will be
switched on if it was previously
disengaged, the air distribution will switch to
Defroster and the fan speed will increase (6 bars
on the display out of a maximum of 8).

Air distribution
Recirculation is controlled manually.

Recirculation is not selected when the engine is
started (fresh air mode). When defroster is chosen, all the front windows are
demisted:
• High fan speed
• The air is directed to the defroster vents
• Normal temperature control
• Recirculation OFF
Press or to decrease or increase the fan • Rear window and door mirror heating ON.
speed. This sets the fan speed (fan speed shown on The system will remain in defroster mode until the
display).
Refer also to Profiler regarding the possibility to or button is pressed.
increase/decrease the automatic fan speed.
The following three buttons for air distribution can be selected indi-
vidually or in combination. Press the button or selection of buttons
to produce the airflow you desire. Pressing the same button twice
will return the system to AUTO. You can also select automatic air
distribution by pressing the AUTO button.
Initial air distribution to take effect on starting the engine can be set
under Profiler (see page 124).
Airflow to windshield vents.
Airflow to facia air vents.
Airflow to floor vents.


Shown below are several examples of air distribution.
Windshield Floor, front and rear
Panel
Windshield – floor (front and rear)


Formation of ice and mist in extreme weather
conditions
It is only in the most extreme conditions that icing and misting of
window glass are likely to be a problem, such as in torrential rain or
severe cold coupled with high relative humidity, or when passengers
are perspiring heavily or wearing wet clothes. The following mea-
sures are recommended if such problems should occur:
1 Select and set the temperature to 70°F (21°C)
2 Select . If this is not enough...
3 Increase the fan speed. If this is not enough...
4 Select a higher temperature.
Panel – floor (front and rear)
Windshield – panel – floor (front and rear)


Calibration
Electric heating, front Calibration is performed automatically
seats 3 every fifth time the car is started after having
The seat cushions and backrests of the front been switched off for more than 2 hours or
seats are heated. if the battery has been disconnected.
Heating is thermostatically controlled. Programming
Heating is controlled manually but can also A number of functions can be customized
be automatic. Refer to Profiler on page 124. under Profiler (see page 124). Further cus-
Three heating levels are available. Pressing tomizations can be made at a workshop. We
the button once will turn the heating on at full recommend that you contact a Saab dealer.
power. Pressing the button a total of 4 times
will turn the heating off. Tips
(before contacting a workshop. We recom-
• = full. mend that you contact a Saab dealer)
• = medium. • If you feel that the ACC system is not func-
tioning satisfactorily, select "Default
• = low. Settings" under Profiler (see page 124.
• To prevent the smell of washer fluid from
entering the car, recirculation can be acti-
vated automatically while the windshield
is washed. The recirculation symbol will
however not light up. This function is
optional; contact a workshop. We recom-
mend that you contact a Saab dealer. This
automatic recirculation is the factory
default setting as long as the system is
working in full "AUTO" model with no
customized settings.

ACC- Convertible Profiler
When the soft top is folded, the ACC system Some of the functions of the ACC system
switches to manual temperature control. can be customized.
There are eleven temperature settings: 0– 1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
10. Profiler.
The system adjusts itself as follows: 2 Select Climate System using the
• AUTO goes out. INFO dial.
• Heating, air distribution and fan speed are 3 Press in the INFO dial.
not affected. ACC display when soft top folded 4 Select Rear Defroster, Heated Seats,
• Recirculation and rear window heating Fan Settings, Air Distribution, A/C Mode,
are cut out. Dual/Single Zone or Default Settings by
• The A/C compressor is switched off (man- turning the dial.
ual activation is possible by pressing the 5 Confirm this selection by pressing the
AC button). INFO dial.
All manual selections are possible with the Once you have adjusted the ACC system
exception of rear window heating. settings under Profiler, CUSTOMIZE will
When the soft top is raised, the system appear on the ACC display.
reverts to the AUTO mode and the previous
set temperature.
Note: When the soft top or all the windows
are open in a hot, humid climate, turning the
air conditioning on manually can cause con-
densation to form on cold surfaces, such as
the air ducts.
Climate System A/C Mode Heated Seats

Auto Auto:
Rear Defroster
The front seat heating is controlled
Auto A/C off automatically.
Dual/Single Zone Select the level by repeatedly
Manual
pressing the appropriate button on
Heated Seats Dual zone the ACC panel: 2 arrows on symbol
Single zone
= standard; 3 arrows = high; 1 arrow
Auto = low. The selected heating setting
Manual Default Settings is saved when the engine is
switched off. Note: The symbol on
Fan Settings Are you sure? the ACC panel goes out if the heat-
High speed Yes No ing is turned off automatically by the
system.
Medium speed Manual:
Explanation of how the ACC system can be
Low speed customized under Profiler. See Electric heating, front seats 3
on page 123.
Air Distribution Rear Defroster This is one of the Default Settings.
Auto Auto:
Manual The rear window and door mirror
heating is controlled automatically.
Windshield This is one of the Default Settings.
Panel Manual:
The rear window and door mirror
Floor heating is switched on with
the button on ACC panel.
Convertible: The rear window heating can-
not be turned on when the soft top is folded.

Fan Settings Dual/Single Zone
High speed: A/C Mode Dual zone:
This selection give a slightly higher Auto: Individual temperature setting for
fan speed than Medium speed Automatic engagement and disen- each zone (see page 116). The sys-
though with continued automatic gagement of the A/C. This is one of tem saves the settings when the
regulation. the Default Settings. engine is switched off. This is one of
Medium speed: the Default Settings.
A/C off:
Normal automatic fan speed. This is Single zone:
A/C compressor OFF (see also
one of the Default Settings. page 118). The A/C compressor Common temperature setting when
Low speed: can be activated temporarily by the engine is started. If the temper-
pressing the AC or AUTO button ature setting for the passenger zone
This selection give a slightly lower is changed, the system will switch to
fan speed than Medium speed while on the road and if the outside
temperature is above 41°F (+5°C). Dual zone control. Single zone con-
though with continued automatic trol will return the next time the
regulation. The A/C will be off the next time the
engine is started, if the engine has engine is started having been
Convertible: Fan speed is not regulated switched off for more than 2 hours.
been switched off for more than
automatically when the soft top is open. 2 hours.
Air Distribution Convertible: The A/C compressor is
Auto: switched off when the soft top is folded
The ACC system adapts air tem- down.
perature and distribution to the pre- Further customizations to this function can
vailing conditions. This is one of the be made at a workshop. We recommend
Default Settings. taht you contact a Saab dealer.
Manual: • The A/C compressor can be on even
Windshield: when the soft top is folded down.
The ACC system directs almost • The A/C compressor can be set to
all air to the windshield. operate as when the soft top was last
folded down.
Panel:
The ACC system directs almost
all air to air vents in the fascia.
Floor:
The ACC system directs almost
all air to the floor.
Interior equipment
Steering wheel
adjustment __________ 128
Electric windows _______ 129
Rearview mirrors_______ 132
Sunroof 3 _____________ 138
Interior lighting ________ 141
Cup holder 3 __________ 142
Power Outlet 3 _________ 144
Storage compartments __ 144
Trunk ________________ 146

128 Interior equipment
Steering wheel
adjustment
WARNING
Only adjust the steering wheel while the
car is stationary so that you are not
distracted from the traffic.
The height and reach of the steering wheel

can be adjusted.
There is a release lever under the steering Lever for steering wheel adjustment
column. Horn signal
1 Pull down the lever to release the steer- Activate the horn by pressing one of the
ing wheel. three areas shown above on the steering
2 Adjust the position of the steering wheel. wheel pad.
3 Raise the lever to the locked position to
lock the steering wheel in position.
When returning the release lever to its
locked position, you may need to adjust the
position of the steering wheel slightly to
allow the lock mechanism to engage cor-
rectly.
Steering wheel lock, see page 162.

Electric windows
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-
ing the side windows. May cause serious
or fatal injuries!
from the ignition switch when you
leave the car. This will prevent
personal injury caused by the activa-
tion of the electric windows, for exam-
ple, due to children playing. Window switches Window switch in rear door
• The person operating the electric
window is responsible for ensuring
that no one, especially a child, has Windows having the automatic closing func- Comfort opening 3
their head, hands or fingers in the tion (option) can be operated as long as the
car is unlocked and until 20 minutes has Comfort opening is the remote opening of
window openings, before raising the windows and the sunroof.
window. passed since the remote control was
removed from the ignition switch. Press and hold the unlocking button on the
• Do not stick any part of the body or the remote control until the windows and
head out through an open window To open optional sunroof start to open (approx. 2 s).
while the car is moving. During comfort opening of the windows,
Press down the front edge of the button one
step. sunroof (option) and soft top, the range is
The electric windows are operated by The window will stop when it is fully open or reduced by approximately half.
means of switches in the door armrests. when the button is released. Convertible: For the remote opening of the
For the electric windows to work, the remote Automatic opening: Press the button all soft top, refer to page 66.
control must be in the ON position in the the way down and release it.
ignition switch.
At the end of a journey and having removed
the remote control, you can still operate the
windows, so long as neither of the front
doors has been opened.

To close Pinch protection 3
On certain model variants, the front electric
windows are equipped with pinch protec-
WARNING tion. This is activated if something gets
trapped between the window pane and door
Take care when closing a window to frame when the window is closed. The
ensure that no one gets caught. window will stop and lower slightly.
Raise the front edge of the button one step. Temporary overriding the pinch protec-
The window will stop when it is fully closed tion
or when the button is released.
Automatic closing 3: Raise the button all WARNING
the way and release it. If the window does
not close automatically, refer to Calibration Make sure nothing obstructs the window Button for temporary deactivation of rear
on page 131. when it is closed without pinch protection. door window switches and temporary
override of window pinch protection
If dirt, ice or similar create so much resis-
tance that the pinch protection cuts in (the
window cannot be closed), the pinch protec-
tion can be temporarily disengaged and the
window closed.
1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
2 Press and hold the button on the
driver’s door while operating the window
in question.
3 Close the window in question.
The pinch protection will be active the next
time a window is operated.

Calibration Calibration is performed as follows: Deactivating the rear window
1 Close the doors. switches
WARNING 2 The car must be running at idling speed. The in the driver’s door deactivates the
The battery charger must not be window switches in the rear doors.
The pinch protection will not be engaged connected to the car’s battery during
calibration. The illuminated switch will change color
after a power break until the electric from green to orange (deactivated).
windows have been calibrated. 3 Open the window fully, the button must
be kept depressed the whole time.
The front electric windows should be cali- 4 Close the window fully, the button must
brated if automatic closing does not work or be kept raised the whole time and for
if the battery has been disconnected. The approx. 1 second after the window has
pinch protection 3 will not work if the win- closed.
dows are not calibrated. 5 Open the window fully, the button must
be kept depressed the whole time and
for approx. 1 second after the window
has fully opened.
6 Close the window fully, and keep the
button raised until the calibration is
confirmed with a "chime".
Repeat steps 3-6 for the windows which
require calibration.
Rearview mirrors
Door mirrors
To adjust
The door mirrors are electrically adjustable
and heated. The controls for adjusting the
mirrors are on the driver’s door:
1 Select a door mirror with the upper
button.
2 Adjust the mirror using the touch pad.
The mirror glass can also be adjusted man-
ually by gently pressing the glass in the 1 Selection of mirror Retracting a door mirror
desired direction. 2 Touch pad for adjustment
The mirror heating is turned on together with 3 Reversing position 3
the rear window heating.
If the car has an electrically adjustable
driver’s seat with memory, the mirror Manual retraction Reversing position 3
settings are stored in the memory (see The door mirrors are designed to fold back On certain model variants, the passenger-
page 20). if knocked. The mirrors can also be side mirror glass can be angled down to
retracted manually. This can be useful when facilitate reversing. Press the button
parking in tight spaces, such as on the car shown in the illustration. This is located
deck of a ferry. Remember to return the door under the touch pad. Return the mirror to its
mirrors to their normal positions before normal position by pressing the button
driving off. again. The mirror will also return to its
normal position if you drive forward approx-
imately 22 yds. (20 meters).

Interior rearview mirror with
autodimming 3
The system is activated when the forward-
facing sensor detects that it is dark outside
and the rear-facing sensor detects, for
example, if the car following has not
dimmed its headlights. The rearview mirror
is then darkened to prevent the strong light
source from dazzling the driver. This dark-
ening is stepless.
The mirror returns to its normal state when
the strong light source diminishes.
The autodimming function can be turned
Mirror position lever OFF with the switch on the lower edge of the Mirror with autodimming
1 Normal position rear-view mirror. 1 Forward-facing sensor
2 Antidazzle position NOTE! 2 Autodimming ON/OFF
3 Rear-facing sensor
Towing a trailer can cause the system to
malfunction, as the rear-facing sensor may
Interior rearview mirror shaded by the trailer.
The interior rearview mirror is of the auto-
dimming type and can be deflected with the
lever on its underside. Certain variants have
an autodimming rearview mirror.
The lever should be in the normal position
when you adjust the mirror.

Interior rearview mirror with Preparations for first-time programming
garage opener, autodimming Before programming the garage opener for
function and compass 3 the first time, you must delete any factory
codes.
Press and hold the two outer buttons until
WARNING the indicator light begins to flash-after
20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not
Make sure that people and objects are out hold for longer that 30 seconds. The garage
of the way of moving door or gate to opener is now in the train (or learning) mode
prevent potential harm or damage. and can be programmed at any time begin-
When programming the garage opener, ning with "Programming" - step 2.
you may be operating a garage door or
gate operator. Therefore it is advised to Programming
park outside of the garage. Buttons for garage opener, autodimming The garage opener can record and store the
and compass frequencies of three different remote con-
Do not use the garage opener with any trols.
garage door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by 1–3 Garage opener The battery in the remote control should be
federal safety standards. (This includes 4 LED fairly new for programming to work well.
any garage door opener model manufac- 5 Autodimming/compass ON/OFF Do not repeat "Programming" - step two
tured before April 1, 1982.). A garage 6 Compass bearing to train additional devices to a second or
door opener which cannot detect an third button. Begin with "Programming" -
object, signaling the door to stop and step three.
reverse, does not meet current federal 1 Turn the ignition ON.
safety standards. Using a garage door Retain your original garage door opener
(transmitter) for future programming proce- 2 Press and hold the two outer buttons
opener without these features increases
risk of serious injury or death. dures (i.e., new vehicle purchase). It is also (buttons one and three) - releasing only
suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, when the indicator light begins to flash
the programmed garage opener buttons be (after 20 seconds). Do not hold the
erased for security purposes, see buttons for longer than 30 seconds and
page 136. do not repeat step two to program a
second and/or third hand-held transmit-
ter to the remaining two buttons.
3 Position the end of your hand-held trans-
mitter 1-3 inches (5-14 cm) away from
the button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.

4 The transmitter should face the mirror antenna wire is attached to the motor- Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
from below or left side of the mirror. head unit. Canadian radio-frequency laws require
5 Simultaneously press and hold both the 9 Firmly press and release the "learn" or transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit)
chosen and hand-held transmitter "smart" button. (The name and color of after several seconds of transmission -
buttons. Do not release the buttons the button may vary by manufacturer.) which may not be long enough for the
until step 5 has been completed. Note: There are 30 seconds in which to ini- garage opener to pick up the signal during
Note: Some gate operators and garage tiate step nine. programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
door openers may require you to replace 10Return to the vehicle and firmly press, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
this Programming Step 4 with procedures hold for two seconds and release the "time-out" in the same manner.
noted in the "Gate Operator / Canadian Pro- programmed button. Repeat the If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-
gramming" section. "press/hold/release" sequence a culties programming a gate operator by
6 After the indicator light changes from a second time, and, depending on the using the "Programming" procedures
slow to a rapidly blinking light, release brand of the garage door opener (or (regardless of where you live), replace
both the mirror and hand-held transmit- other rolling code equipped device), "Programming " step 4 with the following:
ter buttons. repeat this sequence a third time to Note: If programming a garage door opener
7 Press and hold the just-trained button complete the programming process. or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
and observe the indicator light. The garage opener should now activate device during the "cycling" process to pre-
If the indicator light stays on your rolling code equipped device. vent possible overheating.
constantly, programming is complete Note: To program the remaining two but- 4 Continue to press and hold the button
and your device should activate when tons, begin with "Programming" - step while you press and release - every two
the button is pressed and released. three. Do not repeat step two. seconds ("cycle") your hand-held transmit-
Note: To program the remaining two but- ter until the frequency signal has success-
tons, begin with "Programming" - step fully been accepted by the garage opener.
three. Do not repeat step two. (The indicator light will flash slowly and then
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two rapidly.)
seconds and then turns to a constant Proceed with "Programming" step five to
light continue with "Programming" complete.
steps 7-9 to complete the programming of
a rolling code equipped device (most com- NOTICE
monly a garage door opener).
8 At the garage door opener receiver Switch off the power supply to the garage
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate door or gate (or park the car beyond the
the "learn" or "smart" button. This can range of the remote control) while
usually be found where the hanging programming using the "cycling" method
to prevent damaging the electrical motor.

Reprogramming a single button Opening a garage door
To program a device to the garage opener To operate, simply press and release the
using a button previously trained, follow programmed button. Activation will now
these steps: occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door
1 Press and hold the desired button. DO opener, gate operator, security system,
NOT release the button. entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.).
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter
2 The indicator light will begin to flash after of the device may also be used at any time.
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, proceed with "Programming" -
step 3.
Erasing the three buttons

To erase programming from the three but-
tons (individual buttons cannot be erased Buttons for garage opener, autodimming
but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined and compass
below), follow the step noted:
1–3 Garage opener
• Press and hold the two outer buttons until 4 LED
the indicator light begins to flash-after
20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do 5 Autodimming/compass ON/OFF
not hold for longer that 30 seconds. The 6 Compass bearing
garage opener is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed
at any time beginning with "Programming"
- step 3. Autodimming
Press button 5 briefly to switch autodimming
on or off. When autodimming is switched on,
a 1 is displayed briefly in the compass win-
dow. A 0 indicates that autodimming is
switched off. See page 133 for a description
of operation.

Compass
The compass is built into the rearview mir-
ror. The compass bearing is displayed in the
top right-hand corner of the mirror and is
updated every other second. The compass
displays the car’s direction of travel: N, NE,
E, etc.
Switch the compass display on and off by
pressing button 5 for 3 seconds, see illus-
tration on page 136.
Changing zones
The earth’s magnetic field varies depending
on one’s position on the globe. If you drive Compass zones in USA Compass zones in Canada
your car from one magnetic zone to another
the compass setting will need to be changed
to ensure a correct bearing.
1 Study the illustrations to determine the Calibration
correct zone. Calibration is performed automatically
2 Press and hold button 5 until "ZONE" is during travel.
shown in the display on the mirror (6 s). If, for any reason, a manual calibration is
The zone number is now also shown. needed perform as follows:
3 Press button 5 repeatedly to change the 1 Press and hold button 5 until "CAL" and
zone number. There are 15 zones from the compass bearing are displayed
which to choose. Once the correct zone (approx. 9 s).
is selected, release the button and wait 2 Drive in circles (max. 5 mph/8 km/h) or
4 seconds. The compass will now drive as normal until "CAL" is no longer
display the bearing. displayed.
Sunroof 3
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-
ing the electric sunroof. Risk of serious or
fatal injuries!
from the ignition switch when you
leave the car. This will prevent
personal injury caused by the activa-
tion of the electric sunroof, for exam-
ple, due to children playing. Sunroof control 3 Manually controlled closing
• The person operating the electric 1 Manually controlled opening 4 Automatic closing
2 Automatic opening 5 Ventilation position
sunroof is responsible for ensuring
that no one, especially a child, has
their head, hands or fingers in the Sunroof without automatic opening
To open Slide the control rearward to position 1 (see
opening, before closing the sunroof.
Manually controlled opening illustration). The sunroof will stop when you
• Do not stick any part of the body or the Slide the control rearward to its first position. release the control or once it is fully open.
head out through an open window The sunroof will halt when you release the
while the car is moving. control. If you do not release the control, the
sunroof will open to the comfort position. To
The sunroof is operated by the control in the open the sunroof further, release the control
roof console. For the sunroof to work, the and then once again press it rearward.
remote control must be in the ON position in
the ignition switch. Automatic opening
If the car is equipped with windows having Slide the control rearward to the second
the automatic closing function, the sunroof position and release it. The sunroof will
can be opened and closed so long as the car open to the comfort position. To open the
is unlocked until 20 minutes has passed sunroof further, slide the control rearward a
since the remote control was removed from second time.
the ignition switch.

To close Ventilation position (rear edge of Comfort opening 3
sunroof open) Comfort opening is the remote opening of
• To open – press in the control. windows and the sunroof.
WARNING • To close – slide the control forward to the Press and hold the unlocking button on the
second position. remote control until the windows and
Exercise great care when closing the
sunroof to ensure that nothing gets It is also possible to select the ventilation optional sunroof start to open (approx. 2 s).
trapped. position when the sunroof is open by press- During comfort opening of the windows,
ing in the control. The sunroof will then close sunroof (option) and soft top, the range is
automatically. Press the control once reduced by approximately half.
Manually controlled closing more to open the sunroof to its ventilation If the sunroof is in the ventilation position, it
Slide the control forward to its first position. position. will not open.
The sunroof will halt when you release the If you wish to open the sunroof fully from
control. Convertible: For the remote opening of the
the ventilation position, you must first close soft top, refer to page 66.
it (slide the control forward). You can then
Automatic closing 3 slide the control rearward to open the sun-
Slide the control forward to its second posi- roof.
tion and release it. The sunroof will close The sunroof incorporates an interior, man-
fully. ual, sliding sun blind.
The sunroof pinch protection halts closing
and opens the sunroof slightly if something Sunroof without automatic closing 3
obstructs closing.
• To open – press the control up.
Sunroof without automatic closing 3 • To close – slide the control forward to
Slide the control forward to position 3 (see position 3.
illustration). The sunroof will stop when you
release the control or once it is fully closed.

Pinch protection 3
WARNING
Make sure nothing obstructs the sunroof
when it is closed without pinch protection.
The sunroof is equipped with pinch protec-

tion. This is activated if something gets
trapped when the sunroof is being closed.
The sunroof will stop and open slightly.
Temporary overriding the pinch protec-

tion Button for overriding the sunroof pinch
protection Emergency operation of the
If dirt, ice or similar create so much resis-
tance that the pinch protection cuts in (sun- sunroof
roof cannot be closed), the pinch protection In an emergency, such as if there is an elec-
can be temporarily disengaged. trical failure, the sunroof can be operated
with a screwdriver.
1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
Remove the lens from the roof console. Use
2 Press and hold the button on the a screwdriver to press in the pin in the slot
driver’s door while operating the window in the center of the motor shaft and turn the
in question. screwdriver.
3 Close the sunroof with the button on the Turn clockwise to close the sunroof when in
roof console. ventilation position.
The pinch protection will be operative the Turn counter-clockwise to close when in
next time the sunroof is operated. open position.
Rear lighting
1 Interior lighting always off 1 Reading lights
2 Interior lighting controlled by the doors 2 Roof light
3 Interior lighting on continuously
When the switch is in the mid-position (door- interior lighting will be switched off automat-
activated), the interior lighting will come on: ically after 20 minutes to save the battery.
Interior lighting • When the car is unlocked. The glove box lighting is switched on and off
The interior lighting consists of one front and automatically when the glove box is opened
• When a door is opened and the ignition is and closed.
one rear roof light, floor lighting, and cour- OFF.
tesy lights in the doors (certain variants
• When the remote control is removed from
only). The light switch for the interior lighting
the ignition switch.
is located on the roof console by the rear-
view mirror.
The lighting goes out:
• When the car is locked.
• When the ignition is turned on.
• Approx. 20 s after closing all doors.
The lights are dimmed out gradually.
If a door is left open and the light switch is in
position 2 or 3 and the ignition is OFF, the

Trunk lighting Cup holder 3
The trunk lighting is switched on and off
when the trunk lid is opened and closed.
If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be WARNING
switched off automatically after 20 minutes
to prevent the battery from running flat. • The cup holder should not be used to
hold cups made of china or glass as
these can cause personal injury in the
event of a crash.
• Use only paper mugs, plastic bottles
or aluminium cans.
• Avoid spillage, particularly of hot
drinks.
Sun visor with vanity mirror
NOTICE
Sun visor
Illuminated vanity mirrors are provided on Take care not to spill any liquid on the
the sun visors. The lighting comes on when audio system , the ignition switch or the
the cover is raised. like when using the cup holders. Soft
drinks in particular can cause malfunc-
tions.
Cup holders are provided in the fascia, in

the center console compartment between
the front seats and rear seat cushion (Sport
Sedan and SportCombi). The cup holder
between the seats can be raised if you wish
to use the compartment for storage.
Cup holder in fascia Cup holder in center console compart- Cup holder in rear seat cushion 3
ment between front seats 3
Power Outlet 3 Storage compartments

You can use the electrical socket in the stor-
age compartment under the armrest
between the front seats to charge a mobile
WARNING
phone, for example. There is a recess on
each side of the compartment which will The glove box must be closed while trav-
accept a lead so that you can close the lid elling. An open glove box door could
without damaging the charger lead. cause personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING There are additional storage compartments

below the front ashtray and in the doors.
The maximum output of the cigarette
lighter socket is 240 W (20 A). The rating Open the glove box with the button on the
of the socket in the compartment between left of the moulding.
the seats is the same. Overloading can Convertible has lockable glove box. Use
result in melting or even fire. the traditionally key, see page 56.
Sliding cover in glove box to admit cold Card holder Storage compartment between front seats
air 3.
This allows the storage of chocolate dur-
ing hot weather for example.
Storage pocket on front edge of seats 3 Storage pocket on back of seats 3

Trunk
Folding down the rear seat, Sport Sedan
Convertible: The rear seat cannot be folded.
WARNING
• Never drive the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into
position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the
event of heavy braking or a crash.
• Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During
sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and trunk
can climb to 160–180°F (70–80°C). Small children are very
susceptible to heat stroke.
• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
• Never place heavy objects on the parcel shelf. There is always • When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
a danger of loose objects being thrown forward and causing locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since the
injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a center safety belt is mounted in the backrest.
crash. See also page 204.
• When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since other-
wise objects in the trunk could force their way into the cabin
during heavy breaking or a crash.
• Adjust the head restraints for the rear seats to be occupied to
a suitable height before riding in the car.

For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and
the wide part can be folded down separately.
Next to the hinges in the trunk are handles for unlocking the rear seat
backrests.
The operation is easier if the front seats are not too far back and
the rear seat head restraints are fully lowered.
1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle in the
trunk.
2 Fold the backrest forward.
Note: When returning the backrest to its upright position, make
sure that it locks properly in place and that the safety belt does
not get caught.
If the left-hand backrest is not properly locked in position, the follow-
ing message is displayed on the SID (equivalent message displayed
for right-hand backrest):
Rear left seat backrest

unlocked.
Trunk Release Handle, see page 149.

Emergency opening of the narrow backrest, Sport Sedan, see
page 150.

Load-through hatch, Sport Sedan
Convertible: There is no load-through hatch.
WARNING
• Always secure the load firmly, for example using the middle
safety belt. This reduces the danger of personal injury result-
ing from the displacement of the load on hard braking or in the
event of a crash.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 294).
A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to

enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.
Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and
apply the parking brake. This avoids the danger of the car moving
off if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.
• Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.
There is a lock on the rear side of the hatch. Use this to lock or unlock
the hatch.
To lock: Open the hatch and lock the lock. Close the hatch. The
hatch is now locked.
To unlock: Fold down the wide section of the backrest and unlock
the lock. Alternatively, you can unlock the hatch from the trunk.
WARNING
• Lay heavy bags on the floor. Place
smaller and lighter bags on top.
• Secure heavy and bulky items using
the lashing eyes provided in the trunk.
This will avert the danger of luggage
flying around if the car should brake
suddenly or be involved in a crash.
• Secure small items if the backrest is
folded down. Small items can also be
thrown around inside the car and
Trunk Release Handle Tie down eyes in the trunk cause personal injury.
• The elastic cargo net 3 is only
designed for light objects that are to be
Trunk Release Handle Tie down eyes, Sport Sedan kept in place while driving
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release There are tie down eyes in the trunk that
handle located inside the trunk on the latch. should be used to secure loads. In general, • Elastic cargo net 3: WARNING. Avoid
This handle will glow following exposure to loads should be placed as far forward and eye injury. DO NOT overstretch.
light. Pull the release handle down to open as low down as possible in the trunk. ALWAYS keep face and body out of
the trunk from inside. recoil path. DO NOT use when strap
has visible signs of wear or damage.
NOTICE • The rear seat must be in the upright
position to protect against load
The trunk release handle was not displacement in the event of a crash.
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid or as an anchor point when securing
items in the trunk. Improper use of the
trunk release could damage it.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the

Trunk lighting
car, as this will alter its handling char- On the underside of the parcel shelf is a light
acteristics (see page 294). that is switched on and off when the trunk is
opened and closed.
• Match your speed and driving style to If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
how the car is loaded. The handling switched off automatically after 20 minutes
characteristics of the car can be to prevent the battery from running flat.
affected since a load in the trunk will
alter the car’s center of gravity.
Cover over emergency opening lever, on

parcel shelf
Emergency opening of the

narrow backrest, Sport Sedan
The narrow section of the backrest can be
opened in an emergency if the car is without
electricity (not possible to open trunk lid)
and you need to access the trunk for a warn-
ing triangle, for example.
• Remove the cover and depress the yellow
lever forward.
Tools and spare wheel, see page 270.

Folding down the rear seat backrest, SportCombi
WARNING
• Never drive the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into
position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the
event of heavy braking or a crash.
• Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During
sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and trunk
can climb to 160–180°F (70–80°C). Small children are very
susceptible to heat stroke.
• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
• When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since the
center safety belt is mounted in the backrest.
• Adjust the head restraints for the rear seats to be occupied to For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and the
a suitable height before riding in the car. wide part can be folded down separately.
It is easiest to fold down the rear seat backrests if the front seats are
slid forward.
1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle forward.
An unlocked backrest has a red indicator by the handle.
2 Fold the backrest forward.
When returning the backrest to its upright position, make sure that
it locks properly in place. The red indicator by the handle must not
be visible. Also make sure that the seatbelt does not get caught.
WARNING
• Lay heavy bags on the floor. Place smaller and lighter bags on
top.
• Elastic cargo net 3: WARNING. Avoid eye injury. DO NOT
overstretch. ALWAYS keep face and body out of recoil path.
DO NOT use when strap has visible signs of wear or damage.
• Secure heavy and bulky items using the lashing eyes provided
in the trunk. This will avert the danger of luggage flying around
if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a crash.
• Secure small items if the backrest is folded down. Small items
can also be thrown around inside the car and cause personal
injury.

Load-through hatch, SportCombi
A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to
enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.
Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and
apply the parking brake. This avoids the danger of the car moving
off if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.
TEMPORARY
• Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.
WARNING
FILE
• Always secure the load firmly, for example using the middle
safety belt. This reduces the danger of personal injury result-
ing from the displacement of the load on hard braking or in the
event of a crash.

Tie down eyes, 9-3 SportCombi
There are tie down eyes in the trunk that WARNING
should be used to secure loads. In general,
loads should be placed as far forward and • Put heavy loads as low down and as
as low down as possible in the trunk. far forward as possible in the luggage
Driving with the trunk lid open, see compartment, i.e. against the back of
page 204. the rear seat.
• Never stack cargo so high that any
part of the cargo lies above the edge
of the backrest, if a cargo guard 3 is
not being used.
• Always tie down the cargo so that it
cannot be thrown forward during
heavy braking or in the event of a
crash.
• Unsecured and heavy cargo can
increase the risk of injury during hard
braking, sudden avoidance manoeu-
vres and in the event of a crash.
• Use the lashing eyes and suitable
anchorage straps 3 for optimum
securing of loads.
• Provide protection on sharp edges to
prevent damage to the cargo straps.
• If possible, avoid having the rear seat

Cargo net 3
folded down when driving with a heavy
load, because the anchoring possibili- WARNING
ties are restricted when the rear seat
is in this position. That the rear seat • Never overload the cargo net 3. If the
is in the upright is a basic require- elastic breaks this may cause
ment for protection against cargo personal injury. Do not use a cargo net
displacement in the event of a that shows signs of wear.
crash.
• Never use the elastic floor net 3 and
• Improve safety by fastening the outer elastic side net 3 when the rear seat is
seatbelts. Check that the red "indica- folded down. These nets are only
tor-flag" next to the opening handles is intended to keep light objects tidy, not
not visible. If the red "indicator-flag" is for the anchoring of loads.
visible the backrest is not locked. Example of cargo anchoring
• Secure the load in the luggage
• Match your speed and driving style to compartment firmly. Using a cargo net
how the car is loaded. The handling is not considered as load securing.
characteristics of the car can be • The only purpose of a cargo net is to
affected since a load in the trunk will prevent light objects from being
alter the car’s center of gravity. thrown forward into the cabin during
heavy breaking.
• An object weighing 55 lbs. (25 kg)
corresponds to a weight of 2200 lbs.
(1,000 kg) in a front-end collision at
32 mph (50 km/h).
• Adjust the car’s load (passengers and
luggage) so that the gross vehicle
weight and the axle weight are not
exceeded, see page 294.

Cargo net, vertical 3, SportCombi
Fit the net behind the rear seat backrest.
1 Remove the rear cover panels in the
roof.
2 Fit the net’s upper fasteners into the two
rear attachment points in the roof.
3 Secure the net’s hooks in the two
anchorage eyes closest to the rear seat.
Tension the straps.
The cargo net can also be fitted behind the
front seats when the whole rear seat is
folded.
1 Remove the front cover panels in the Attaching the cargo net to the roof Cargo net fitted in front anchorage eye
roof.
2 Snap the net’s upper fasteners into the
two front attachment points in the roof.
3 Secure the net’s hooks in the two outer
eyes furthest back on the front seats’
rails down by the floor. Tension the
straps.

Cargo net, floor mounted 3, SportCombi
1 Fold up the floor. Position the edges of
the floor in the slots in the side pieces.
2 Fit the bag/carrier on the lower floor and
secure the net’s hooks in the folded-up
floor.
Cargo net, floor mounted, SportCombi Cargo net, floor mounted, SportCombi
1 Upper bracket. Make sure that the rubber with subwoofer
bands are not twisted 1 Upper bracket. Make sure that the rubber
2 Lower anchorage point bands are not twisted
2 Lower anchorage point

Starting and driving
Ignition switch ________ 160 Economical driving_____ 193

Steering wheel lock ____ 162 Driving in cold weather__ 195
Starting the engine ____ 162 Driving in hot climates __ 197
Important considerations Towing a trailer 3_______ 198
for driving __________ 164 Driving with a roof rack
Refueling ____________ 167 load ________________ 202
Engine Break-in Period _ 171 Driving with a load _____ 204
Manual transmission___ 172 Driving with the trunk lid
Automatic open________________ 204
transmission 3 ______ 173 Driving in deep water ___ 204
Cruise control ________ 179 Driving at night ________ 205
Braking ______________ 180 Towing the car_________ 205
Traction Control System Driving with the compact
(TCS) ______________ 183 spare tire ____________ 208
Electronic Stability Jump starting _________ 208
Program (ESP) 3 _____ 185 For long trips __________ 211
Parking brake_________ 187
Parking ______________ 187
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars Saab Parking
market specification, options or accessories). Assistance 3 ________ 190
160 Starting and driving
Ignition switch
WARNING
The ignition switch is located on the center
console between the front seats. In cars • Always remove the remote control
with automatic transmission, the remote before leaving children unattended in
control can only be removed when the the car.
selector lever is in position P.
• Apply the parking brake before remov-
NOTICE ing the remote control.
• Never remove the remote control
Take care not to spill drinks or to drop while the car is moving. This will acti-
crumbs over the ignition switch. If dirt or vate the steering wheel lock and make
liquid gets into it, the switch may not it impossible to steer the car.
operate properly.
If snow from clothing falls into the ignition
switch and melts, the ignition switch can
seize (freeze). Brush snow off clothing
before getting into the car.

To allow the various systems in the car time
LOCK position to register that the remote control has been
The parking lights, hazard warning lights and interior lighting can be turned
inserted into the ignition switch, do not turn
on.
the remote control for roughly half a second.
Cars with automatic transmission: Move the gear lever to P.
The gear lever is locked in position. This is the only position in which the
remote control can be removed.
Cars with manual transmission: The remote control can be removed
regardless of the position of the gear lever.
OFF position
Parts of the electrical system are operative.
Do not leave the remote control in the OFF position with the engine
not running as this could cause the battery to run flat in a matter of
hours.
Cars with automatic transmission: The gear lever is not locked. See
also page 174.
If the remote control is turned from ON to OFF before the car is stationary
then turning to LOCK may not be possible. In which case turn the remote
control to the ON position until the ABS lamp goes out, approx. 2 s. Fol-
lowing which, turn it back to OFF.
ON position
The entire electrical system is operative.
Do not leave the remote control in the ON position when the engine
is not running.
Turn the remote control to the OFF position to disconnect the electrical
system.
When you turn the remote control to ON, some indicator and warning lights
will come on in the main instrument panel. These should go out after about
3 seconds.
ST - starter position
The starter motor operates (automatic transmission: selector lever must
be in P or N) when the remote control is turned to this position. When
released, the remote control will spring back to the ON position.
The car has an electronic restart lock. If the engine fails to start, the remote
control must first be turned back to a position between OFF and LOCK
before the starter motor can be operated again.
Steering wheel lock If a fault arises affecting the steering wheel

lock, the following message will be
Starting the engine
The steering wheel lock is electronic. The displayed on the SID:
lock engages when the remote control is
removed from the ignition and unlocks when Steering lock malfunc. WARNING
the remote control is inserted. A click can be Make a safe stop.
heard when the steering wheel lock locks Contact Saab dealer. • When starting the engine:
and unlocks. - Sit down in the driver’s seat.
If the car is parked with one front wheel If the steering wheel lock malfunctions while - Depress the clutch pedal fully (M/T). If
touching the curb, for example, you may the remote control is in the ignition switch, the gear lever is not in the neutral posi-
need to turn the steering wheel slightly this may prevent the removal of the remote tion, the clutch pedal must be fully
when you insert the remote control to allow control or prevent the car from being depressed or the car will jump
the steering wheel lock to unlock. If you do restarted once the engine has been forwards or backwards, which may
not succeed on first attempt you must switched off. cause a crash.
remove the remote control before trying If you have to leave the car, lock the car by - Never start the car from outside the
again. Turn the steering wheel and insert pressing down the lock buttons on the vehicle, e.g. through a window that is
the remote control into the ignition switch. doors. Lock the front left door from outside down. This could lead to serious
If the steering wheel lock does not disen- with the traditional key (see page 52). The personal injury.
gage it will not be possible to turn the remote car is now locked but the alarm is inactive.
control in the ignition switch. • Cars with automatic transmission:
select position P to remove the ignition
The following message is shown on the SID: key. The key can only be removed in
Steering wheel locked. this gear position.
Pull out key, turn steering • Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless,
wheel. Try again. odorless, poisonous gas. Be alert to
the danger of CO – always open the
garage doors before starting the
engine in the garage.
• Do not rest or sleep in the car when
parked with the engine running. There
is a risk of depressing the accelerator
which could lead to engine damage.
• There is also a danger of CO poison-
ing if the exhaust system is leaking.

Starting the engine Cars with automatic transmission Useful tips on starting the engine
Avoid racing the engine or loading it heavily The selector lever must be in the P or N If the engine has failed to start after several
before it has warmed up. Do not drive away position. attempts in very cold weather, proceed as
before the warning and indicator lights have 1 The selector lever must be in the P or N follows:
gone out. position. 1 Turn the ignition switch to ON (it is
The engine has an automatic choke and 2 Keep your foot on the brake pedal. essential that you turn the ignition to
should be started as follows: Note! Once the engine has started, the ON before depressing the accelerator).
brake pedal will sink. This is perfectly 2 Press the accelerator to the floor and run
Cars with manual transmission normal. the starter motor for 5-10 seconds. This
To start the engine the clutch pedal must 3 Start the engine. Let the remote control will prevent the engine being flooded
be fully depressed. spring back as soon as the engine has (fully depressed accelerator cuts off the
1 Make sure the parking brake is applied. started and is running smoothly. fuel supply).
2 Depress the clutch pedal but do not Allow the engine to idle for about 3 Now start the engine in the normal way
touch the accelerator. 10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at - do not touch the accelerator.
3 Start the engine. Let the remote control least 3 minutes after starting. If the engine stalls immediately after starting
spring back as soon as the engine has (e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),
started and is running smoothly. do not touch the accelerator when restarting
Allow the engine to idle for about the engine.
10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at
least 3 minutes after starting.
Important 2 Stopping the engine

NOTICE
• Do not rev the engine immediately
considerations for before switching it off - stop the engine • If the engine sounds strange there is a
driving when it is idling. malfunction. We recommend that you
3 Regulating the boost pressure contact a Saab dealer immediately.
• One of the advantages of boost pres- • The use of fuel with too low an octane
• Do not use full throttle until the engine sure regulation is that the engine can rating can cause serious engine
is warm, so as to avoid unnecessary also be run safely on gasoline with a damage.
wear. If the needle of the turbo gauge lower octane rating, although not lower
repeatedly enters the red zone, the than AON 87. However, engine perfor-
engine may suddenly lose power, due Limp-home
mance will fall slightly and heavy load- The engine management system has a
to the initiation of a monitoring system ing and laboring should be avoided. For
that limits the boost pressure. We diagnostic feature that checks a number of
optimum performance, use the recom- internal functions. If a fault is detected in the
recommend that you contact a Saab mended grade of fuel.
dealer as soon as possible. throttle valve, the engine management
• Under certain barometric conditions • The maximum boost pressure is regu- system will set the throttle system to the
(high outside temperature and/or high lated according to the tendency of the limp-home mode. This means:
altitude) the needle may enter the first engine to knock. Short-lived knocking • idling control will be poor (uneven idling
part of the red zone without necessarily is perfectly normal. This can occur since regulated by ignition and fuel
indicating that a fault has arisen. when the engine is running at about supply)
• A protective function (interruption of the 3,000 rpm under a heavy load. The
extent of this knocking will depend on • engine performance will be reduced
fuel supply) limits the engine speed. • the cruise control will not function
the grade of fuel in the tank.
• Isolated instances of knocking can • the capacity of the A/C compressor will be
occur with low-octane fuel. This limited.
controlled form of knocking, followed by
a reduction in the boost pressure, is a
sign that the control system is working
normally, and is perfectly safe for the
engine.

If the diagnosis function detects a fault in the Important considerations with • Have the car serviced regularly in accor-
catalytic converters dance with the service program.
engine management system, the light
"Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)" in The catalytic converter is an emission con- • Always be alert to any misfiring of the
the instrument panel will come on (see trol device incorporated in the car’s exhaust engine (not running on all cylinders) and
page 85). Have the car checked at a work- system. It consists of a metal canister with a any loss of power or performance. At the
shop as soon as possible. We recommend honeycomb insert, the cells of which have first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed
that you contact a Saab dealer. walls coated in a catalytic layer (precious and take the car to a workshop. We
metal alloy). recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer.
NOTICE • If the engine fails to start (in severe cold or
NOTICE if the battery is flat), the car can be bump
If "Engine malfunction (CHECK started (manual transmission only) or
Use only unleaded gasoline. Leaded
ENGINE)" warning light starts to flash started using jump leads to a donor
gasoline is detrimental to the catalyst and
(indicating that the engine is misfiring and battery. However, as soon as you have
oxygen sensor and will seriously impair
the catalytic converter can be damaged), started the engine, it is important that it
the function of the catalytic converter.
ease off the accelerator slightly. The light runs on all cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow
should go out or start to shine constantly. it to idle for up to 5 minutes to give it time
If the light continues to flash despite To ensure that the catalytic converter con- to settle and run smoothly. If, after this
easing off the accelerator, you may tinues to function properly, and also to avoid time, the engine still fails to run properly,
continue to drive the car but at the mini- damage to the converter and its associated switch off the engine to avoid serious
mum throttle permitted by the current traf- components, the following points must be damage to the catalytic converter. We
fic situation. Have the car checked as observed: recommend that you contact a Saab
soon as possible. We recommend that dealer for advice.

• Never park the car on dry grass or other
combustible material. The catalytic
converter gets very hot and could there- NOTICE
fore start a fire. If the car runs out of gas, air may be drawn
• Never drive off if the engine is misfiring. in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
• If you bump start the car when the engine the catalytic converter to be damaged by
is already at normal working temperature, overheating.
the engine must start to run on all cylin-
ders. Abort bump starting if the engine
fails to start immediately.
Failure to strictly follow these instructions WARNING
can result in damage to the catalytic con-
verter and associated components, and If the engine is being run with the car on a
could represent a breach of the warranty rolling road or dynamometer, to ensure
adequate cooling, air must be blown into
Engine management system with catalytic
conditions. converter
the engine compartment and under the 1 Engine control module
car at a rate equivalent to the ram-air 2 Oxygen sensor
effect that would obtain at the corre- 3 Catalytic converter
sponding road speed.

Refueling
NOTICE NOTICE
WARNING
• Do not overfill. Fuel should not come The engine control module (ECM) moni-
If you spill fuel and then something ignites right up the filler pipe as room for toring the engine parameters also stores
it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can expansion is needed for when the fault codes.
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap temperature rises. Under certain circumstances, this may
too quickly. This spray can happen if your • The use of fuel with too low an octane cause constant illumination of the Engine
tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot rating can cause serious engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) lamp
weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and damage.
, thus indicating a fault that must be
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then • Clean fuel from painted surfaces as checked by your Saab dealer, see
unscrew the cap all the way. soon as possible. page 85.
Gasoline fumes are highly explosive.
NOTE: always observe the following two
Therefore:
measures:
• never smoke while refueling
• Make sure that the fuel filler cap is
• never use gasoline for any purpose screwed on correctly before the
other than as engine fuel engine is started. Screw on the fuel
• gasoline is extremely flammable and filler cap until you hear a distinct click.
can cause severe burns. No open or • Avoid driving with the fuel low level
exposed flames near gasoline indicator illuminated. The symbol illu-
• do not use a mobile phone at the minates when less than approximately
same time as refueling 2.5 gallons (10 litres) of fuel remains
in the tank.

Refueling
NOTICE
WARNING Do not overfill. Fuel should not come right
up the filler pipe as expansion room is
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do needed when the temperature rises.
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of
fuel by shutting off the pump or by notify- • Fill to maximum filling capacity.
ing the station attendant. Leave the area • Stop filling after the first time that the
immediately. nozzle trips to shut off the flow of fuel.
• Filling capacity can differ between
1 Switch off the engine. different fuel stations and outside
2 Open the filler cap, located in the right- temperature. Fuel tank volume when
hand rear fender. nozzle trips to shut off, may vary by Filler cap
3 Insert the fuel pump nozzle beyond the 0.5 gal. (2 liters).
flange on the filler pipe and let the first • Do not fill fuel all the way up the filler
mark (a ring, a pimple or the first spring- pipe. The gasoline must be allowed Filler cap
coil) rest on the flange. Do not withdraw room for expansion especially during To remove the filler cap, turn it slowly to the
the nozzle while filling is in progress. hot weather. left (counterclockwise). The filler cap has a
4 Cease refueling the first time the pump spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon,
stops, and wait a few seconds after it will spring back to the right.
you´ve finished pumping before you When you put the filler cap back on, turn it
remove the nozzle. to the right (clockwise) until you hear three
clicks. Make sure you fully install the cap.
The most effective way to prevent conden-
sation forming in the tank (and thus avoid
possible running problems) is to keep the
tank full.
Refer to page 195 for information regarding
gasoline anti-freeze.

Filling a portable fuel container Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
Fuel
WARNING Use of the recommended fuel is an impor-
tant part of the proper maintenance of your
Never fill a portable fuel container while it vehicle.
is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite For optimum performance Saab recom-
the gasoline vapor. You can be badly mends:
burned and your vehicle damaged if this • 2.0t 175 hp – AON 90.
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and • 2.0T 210 hp – AON 90.
others:
• 2.8 V6 230 hp and 250 hp — AON 90.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers. Gasoline Octane
When refueling, hang the filler cap inside
the fuel door • Do not fill a container while it is inside Use regular unleaded gasoline with a
a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup posted octane of 87 or higher. If the octane
bed or on any surface other than the is less than 87, you may get a heavy knock-
ground. ing noise when you drive. If this occurs, use
The fuel door has a built in filler cap holder a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
slot located on the fuel door. Slide the white • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operat- soon as possible. Otherwise, you might
ring on the cap into the slot. damage your engine. A little pinging noise
ing the nozzle. Contact should be
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure when you accelerate or drive uphill is con-
maintained until the filling is complete.
to get the right type. Your dealer can get one sidered normal. This does not indicate a
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not • Do not smoke while pumping gaso- problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel
fit properly. line. is necessary. If you are using 87 octane or
higher-octane fuel and hear heavy knock-
ing, your engine needs service.

Gasoline Specifications California Fuel Additives
It is recommended that gasoline meet spec- If your vehicle is certified to meet California To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the
ifications which were developed by automo- Emission Standards (see the underhood United States are now required to contain
bile manufacturers around the world and emission control label), it is designed to additives that will help prevent engine and
contained in the World-Wide Fuel Charter operate on fuels that meet California speci- fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
which is available from the Alliance of Auto- fications. If this fuel is not available in states your emission control system to work prop-
mobile Manufacturers at www.autoalli- adopting California emissions standards, erly. You should not have to add anything to
ance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline meet- your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
ing these specifications could provide fuels meeting federal specifications, but only the minimum amount of additive
improved driveability and emission control emission control system performance may required to meet U.S. Environmental Pro-
system performance compared to other be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp tection Agency regulations. Saab recom-
gasoline. may turn on and your vehicle may fail a mends that you buy gasolines that are
smog-check test. See Engine malfunction advertised to help keep fuel injectors and
(CHECK ENGINE) on page 85. If this intake valves clean. If your vehicle experi-
occurs, return to your authorized Saab ences problems due to dirty injectors or
dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that valves, try a different brand of gasoline.
the condition is caused by the type of fuel Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
used, repairs may not be covered by your ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gaso-
warranty. lines may be available in your area to con-
tribute to clean air. Saab recommends that
you use these gasolines, particularly if they
comply with the specifications described
earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed
for fuel that contains methanol. Do not
use fuel containing methanol. It can cor-
rode metal parts in your fuel system and
also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be cov-
ered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated
for low emissions may contain an octane-
enhancing additive called methylcyclopen-
tadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask
the attendant where you buy gasoline

whether the fuel contains MMT. Saab does
not recommend the use of such gasolines.
Engine Break-in Period Wearing in new brake pads
New brake pads take time to bed in, about
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of Pistons, cylinder bores and bearings need
90 miles (150 km) if the car is driven largely
spark plugs and the performance of the time to obtain uniform, wear-resistant
under stop-and-go conditions or about
emission control system may be affected. surfaces. 300 miles (500 km) of highway driving.
The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If a new engine is driven too hard, this grad-
To extend the useful life of the pads, avoid
If this occurs, return to your authorized Saab ual process of bedding-in will not be possi- hard braking as much as possible.
dealer for service. ble and the life of the engine will be short-
ened.
Fuels in Foreign Countries During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
If you plan on driving in another country out- do not exceed 5,000 rpm.
side the United States or Canada, the In addition, refrain from driving the car at full
proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use throttle, other than for brief instances,
leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recom- during the first 1,800 miles (3,000 km).
mended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel
would not be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto
club, or contact a major oil company that
does business in the country where you will
be driving.
Manual transmission
Clutch interlock
To start the car, the clutch pedal must be
depressed.
When changing gear, fully depress the
clutch pedal and then release it smoothly. It
is inadvisable to drive with your hand resting
on the gear lever, as this can increase the
wear on the gearbox.
Before reverse (R) can be engaged, you
must lift the ring underneath the gear knob.
Gear positions, 5-speed Gear positions, 6-speed
NOTICE
When reverse gear is to be engaged,
the car must be at a standstill with
the accelerator fully released.

Automatic
transmission 3
WARNING
• Depress the brake pedal when shifting Indication of gear position on main
the selector lever from P or N. instrument panel
• The car must be at a standstill before
P, R or N is selected. You have to have
your foot on the brake pedal to move The engine can only be started when the
the lever out of P. If the car is still selector lever is in the P or N position.
moving when a drive position is subse- When the car is stationary, the engine must
quently selected, this could cause a
Selector lever be idling when you move the selector lever
1 Position for manual gear selection from one position to another. If not, the
crash or damage the automatic trans-
mission. transmission could be damaged.
• Never park the car with the selector The remote control can only be removed
lever in a drive position, even if the when the selector lever is in the P position. NOTICE
parking brake is on.
After selecting a drive position, pause
• If you want to leave the car with the briefly to allow the gear to engage (the car
engine running, move the selector starts to pull a little) before you acceler-
lever to P or N and apply the parking ate.
brake.
The automatic transmission has an elec-

tronic control module. The control module
receives information including accelerator
position and road speed. Using this and
other information, it controls the hydraulic
pressure of the transmission to ensure that
gear changing is as smooth as possible.

Adaptive gear change patterns Thermal transmission protection
The adaptive gear change pattern function The transmission has built-in protection
adapts gear changing to the prevailing driv- against overheating. This protection is pro-
ing conditions. The transmission control vided by the control module, which changes
module senses the engine load, vehicle gear change patterns.
speed and temperature of the transmission. 1 If the temperature of the transmission
A suitable gear change pattern is then fluid exceeds 257°F (125°C), the gear
selected automatically to avoid unneces- change pattern is changed.
sary gear changes and undesired increases
in transmission temperature. 2 If the temperature of the transmission
fluid exceeds 275°F (135°C), the gear
Certain variants use a special change pat- change pattern is again changed.
tern for the first few minutes after a cold start
so that the catalytic converter reaches its 3 If the temperature of the transmission
working temperature more quickly. fluid exceeds 302°F (150°C), engine
Selector lever detent torque will be limited to 147 ft.lbs.
(200 Nm).
The following message is shown on the SID:
Park Brake Shift Lock Gearbox too hot.
The transmission has a security function Make a safe stop.
known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move Open hood to cool down.
the gear selector lever out of the P or N posi-
tion, the gear selector lever detent (catch) If this message appears, stop the car as
must be pressed in at the same time as the soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
brake pedal is held depressed. engine to idle until the message has gone
The detent button on the selector lever has out. The selector lever should be in
to be pressed in before the lever can be position P.
moved between certain positions.
Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
Lock, see page 176.

Lock-up Limp-home
The transmission’s torque converter has a WARNING
lock-up function. This can lock the torque NOTICE
converter, thus reducing the engine speed Remember to use the braking effect of the
and fuel consumption. engine (1st, 2nd or 3rd gear) when you Do not tow a trailer if limp-home mode is
are descending long or steep hills to engaged.
Kick-down spare the brakes.
When the accelerator is pressed down fully,
Overheating can cause the brakes to If the transmission malfunctions, the control
a down change is made to optimize acceler-
fade! module will activate limp-home mode. Driv-
ation, e.g. for overtaking. ability will be affected to varying degrees.
Following this, the next higher gear will be
Towing The following message is shown on the SID:
selected at the optimum engine speed,
unless you ease off the accelerator before Towing of cars with automatic transmission, Gearbox malfunction.
reaching this. see page 205. Limited performance.
Driving in hilly country with a Descending hills
heavy load If the speed of the car increases while In this mode, only 2nd and 5th gears are
The transmission fluid can overheat when descending a steep hill, despite the acceler- available. Select 2nd gear when driving at
the gearbox is strained, for example, when ator being released, the control module will low speeds and 5th gear at higher speeds.
driving with a trailer on hilly roads. To avoid change down. If you desire more powerful 2nd gear must be selected manually. Select
the transmission fluid overheating, always engine braking, manually select a lower 5th gear manually or move the selector
drive with the selector lever in the D posi- gear (see page 178). lever to D (see page 178).
tion. The adaptive gear change patterns are
then active. Cars with 5-speed transmission
High air temperatures or a faulty oil cooler In this mode, only 2nd and 5th gears are
can also cause the transmission fluid to available. Select 2nd gear when driving at
overheat. Overheating reduces the service low speeds and 5th gear at higher speeds.
life of the fluid. 2nd gear must be selected manually. Select
5th gear manually or move the selector
lever to D, see page 178.
Cars with 6-speed transmission 3

• The car may be totally powerless. If this is
case, have the car transported to a work-
shop to have the problem rectified.

• The car may feel weak but can be driven Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
carefully to a workshop to have the prob- Lock
lem rectified.
• Drivability may barely be affected. NOTICE
Irrespective of the drivability of the car, the
car must be taken to a workshop to have the Due to electrical problems it may not be
problem checked and rectified. possible to move the selector lever out of
the park position, even if the ignition is
ON. If for some reason the selector lever
has to be moved out of the park position
(i.e. to tow the car a short distance) do as
described below.
1 Apply the parking brake. Temporary override of Park Brake Shift

2 Lift up the rubber mat in the storage Lock
compartment ahead of the selector
lever.
3 Under the floor of the storage compart-
ment is a yellow plastic lever. Use a thin
tool, such as a screwdriver, to press and
hold the plastic lever while moving the
selector lever from P to N.
4 Remove the tool.
5 Release the parking brake if the car is to
be moved immediately, otherwise it
should remain on.
Check fuse 6 in the engine bay fuse box.
If the fuse is OK the battery may be dead.
Contact a workshop to have the problem
checked and rectified. We recommend that

Selector lever positions N
You must press the brake pedal to move
P
The selector lever is locked and the transmission the selector lever from the neutral position (N).
is mechanically blocked. In neutral, the transmission is disengaged from the
The engine can be started. engine. The engine can be started but make sure
the parking brake is on to prevent unexpected
To move the selector lever out of the P position,
movement.
depress the brake pedal and press in the detent
To prevent the engine and transmission becoming
(catch) on the selector lever.
Only select the park position (P) when the car is hotter than necessary, select N for long stops with
stationary. the engine running, e.g. when stuck in a traffic jam.
At traffic lights, leave the selector lever in the drive
position (D).
R
Only select the reverse position (R) when the car D
stationary. The detent release button must be The drive position (D) is the normal one for forward
pressed before the selector lever can be moved driving. The transmission shifts automatically
to R. between all gears from 1st to 5th, the timing of
Wait until reverse gear has engaged before which depends on factors such as the current
touching the accelerator. accelerator position and the speed of the car.
Pause for a moment before applying the acce-
lerator, to allow the gears to engage.

Sentronic, manual gear selection
Move the selector lever to the manual position (M)
(to the left position D) to select gear manually.
Select a higher gear by pressing the selector lever
forward or a lower gear by pulling it back. The
selector lever will return to a position adjacent to
the letter M after each gear change.
An example of when you may wish to make
manual gear changes is when overtaking, to
enable you to remain in a low gear for an extended
period of time.
If the road surface is slippery, you may wish to start
off in 2nd or 3rd to reduce the risk of wheel spin.
When descending steep hills you should select a Steering wheel controls for manual gear
low gear to increase the braking effect of the selection 3
engine and thus spare the brakes.
Manual gear selections are displayed on the main instrument
panel. The letter M and the current gear are displayed. Certain variants also have steering wheel controls for manual gear
selection. On these models, it is possible to change gear manually
When the selector lever is in the M position, as opposed to the D
using the selector lever and the steering wheel controls. The steer-
position, the engine is much more responsive to changes in accel-
ing wheel controls are only active when the selector lever is in the M
erator position. The accelerator has a different feel.
position.
When changing down, the desired gear can be selected but the
Select a higher gear by pressing the right-hand button and a lower
transmission will not change down until the engine speed is low
gear by pressing the left-hand button.
enough to avoid overrevving.

Cruise control To set the desired speed
(Cruise control system) 1 Slide the switch to ON.
2 Move the thumbwheel up to SET/+ or
SET/– when the car has reached the
WARNING desired speed (above 15 mph (25 km/
h)).
Do not use the cruise control system in
wet or icy conditions, in dense traffic or on To increase the preset speed
winding roads. You can increase the speed in any of
the following ways:
For safety reasons (brake system func-
tion), the brakes must be applied once • Accelerate to the desired speed. Jog the
when the engine has started, before the control to SET/+ or SET/–.
cruise control system can be activated. Cruise control switches • Jog the control to SET/+ to increase the
The following message is shown on the SID: speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) (when cruise
control already engaged).
Tap brakes lightly before The system has the following functions: • Hold the control in the SET/+ position until
using cruise control. 1 ON: engaged the desired speed is reached (when
cruise control already engaged).
2 OFF: disengaged
3 SET/+: sets the speed and increases
the set speed
4 SET/ –: sets the speed and decreases
the set speed
5 RESUME: re-engages the system at the
set speed
The CRUISE indicator light in the main
instrument panel comes on when the switch
is slid to ON. If you switch off the engine
while the cruise control is ON, the system
will be ON the next time the engine is
started.

To reduce the preset speed To re-engage the system Braking
You can reduce speed in any of the follow- Slide the switch to RESUME. The car will
It is good practice to try your brakes period-
ing ways: return to the previously set speed. Vehicle
ically while driving. This is particularly
speed must exceed 15 mph (25 km/h).
• Brake to the desired speed. Jog the important when driving in heavy rain, on
control to SET/+ or SET/–. To disengage the system roads with a lot of surface water, in snow or
• Jog the control to SET/– to reduce the in salty slush. In such conditions a slight
The system will be disengaged: delay in the braking effect may be noticed.
speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• As soon as the brake or clutch pedal is To minimize this delay, dry the brakes by
• Hold the control in the SET/– position until applying them lightly now and again. This
the desired speed is reached. depressed (cars with manual transmis-
sion). should also be done after the car has been
washed, and in extremely damp weather.
Temporary increase in speed • When the switch is slid towards OFF. See
also heading "To disengage the system To avoid the brakes becoming overheated,
Accelerate, without shifting down (manual
temporarily". such as when negotiating long descents
transmission), to exceed the set speed such
with a drop of several hundred yards (hun-
as for overtaking. When you release the • When the switch is slid to OFF. dred metres), select a low gear to utilize the
accelerator, the car will return to the set • When the TCS/ESP system is operative. braking effect of the engine. If the car has
speed. • When position N is selected (cars with automatic transmission, select 1st or 2nd
automatic transmission). gear.
To disengage the system
temporarily You can help to prolong the life of the brakes
by thinking ahead and braking harder over
Slide the switch to the left towards OFF, but short periods, rather than braking more
only as far as to disengage the cruise con- moderately over long stretches.
trol. Allow the switch to spring back.

ABS brakes The brake system provides Electronic
WARNING Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distri-
butes the brake pressure between the front
• It is prudent to try your brakes from WARNING and rear wheels, in such a way as to achieve
time to time, especially when driving in optimum braking performance irrespective
heavy rain, through water collected on • The additional safety afforded by the of the car’s speed or load.
the road, in snow, on a wet road ABS system is not designed to allow The ABS has a built-in diagnostics function
surface or in salty slush. In such condi- drivers to drive faster but to make which will switch on the ABS warning light
tions, the brakes may take longer than normal driving safer. if a fault is detected in the system (see
normal to take effect. To rectify this, • To stop as quickly as possible, without page 84).
touch the brake pedal periodically to loss of directional stability, whether The following message will appear on the
dry the brakes out. the road surface is dry, wet or slippery, SID (and corresponding symbol on main
• The same applies after the car has press the brake pedal down hard instrument unit) if a fault is detected:
without letting up (do not pump the
been washed or when the weather is
pedal), declutching simulta-
very humid. Antilock brake malfunction.
neously, and steer the car to safety.
• Avoid parking the car with wet brakes.
Before parking, and if the traffic condi- The Antilock Braking System (ABS) modu-
tions allow, brake quite heavily so that lates the brake pressure to each wheel. The
the brake discs and pads warm up and pressure is automatically reduced just
dry. before the wheel locks up and then
increases again to the point at which the
• The brakes are power assisted and it wheel is just about to lock. The wheel sen-
should be kept in mind that the servo sors send information to the brake system’s
unit only provides the power assis- electronic control module for every 4 or so
tance when the engine is running. inches (decimetre) that the car rolls. This
• The brake pressure required when the information is processed continuously to
engine is off, (e.g. when the car is ensure that the adjustment of the brake
being towed) is roughly four times the pressure will be as exact as possible.
normal pedal force required. The Adjustment takes place up to 12 times per
pedal also feels hard and unrespon- second.
sive.
• Overheating can cause the brakes to
fade!

The ABS system will not reduce the braking
distance on loose gravel, snow or ice but,
because the wheels cannot lock up, steer-
ing control is retained.
When the ABS system operates you will feel
the brake pedal pulsate and hear a ticking
noise, both of which are perfectly normal.
Apply the brake pedal with full force (you
cannot press too hard), declutch and if nec-
essary steer to safety.
Do not release the brake pedal before the
car has come to a halt or the danger is
past!
The above is critical. Braking with ABS brakes. Braking with ABS – evasive steering
If the road is slippery, the ABS system will Indication that the system is operating:
operate even when only light pressure is pulsating brake pedal and ticking noise
applied to the brake pedal. This means that
the driver can brake gently to test the condi-
tion of the road and adapt their driving
accordingly.
It is well worth practising the use of ABS
brakes on a skid pan or other suitable
facility.

Hill Start Assist (HSA) 3 Traction Control that one or both of the wheels would lose
their grip were the car not equipped with the
(Hillstarting assistance)
System (TCS) TCS, e.g.:
This function facilitates starting on a hill. Anti-spin system • When the car is pulling away or accelerat-
When the parking brake has been released ing with the front wheels on different
and the foot is moved off the brake pedal it surfaces (e.g. one slippery and one dry),
WARNING the TCS functions like an electronic differ-
can take approx. 1.5 s before the brakes
release. The brakes release as soon as the ential lock, making sure that both wheels
When driving normally, the TCS system rotate at the same speed. The system
accelerator pedal is depressed within this helps to improve the car’s directional
time. also functions when the car is reversing.
stability. The TCS must not be regarded
as a system to enable the driver to main- • When cornering, if the inside front wheel
rotates faster than the other wheels.
tain higher speeds. The same precau-
tions must be adopted as normal for safe
cornering and driving on slippery roads.
TCS OFF
lights up under the speedometer if:
How the system works • a fault has been detected and the system
The Traction Control System (TCS) is has therefore been switched off
designed to prevent wheelspin. This • there is a fault in the ABS system
enables the car to achieve the best possible
• the system has been switched off
grip and, hence, maximum tractive effort,
manually.
together with greater stability.
The TCS uses information from the ABS
wheel sensors to detect when the front (driv-
ing) wheels are rotating faster then the rear
wheels.
If the two front wheels are rotating faster
than the rear wheels, the torque from the
engine is reduced to eliminate the differ-
ence.
The process continues until all the wheels
are rotating at the same speed.
The advantages of the TCS become most
apparent when the cohesion between the
front wheels and the road surface is so low

Turning the TCS off
The TCS is switched on automatically when
the engine is started.
You can switch the system off manually with
the TCS button, whereupon the light
under the speedometer will come on. The
TCS cannot be switched off if the car is trav-
elling faster than 35 mph (60 km/h).
It may be necessary to switch off the system
if the car has become bogged down, for
instance. Press TCS to switch it on again.
If a fault is detected in the ABS, the TCS will
be switched off automatically.
TCS button
The following message is shown on the SID:
Traction control failure.

TCS indicator Contact Saab dealer.
When the remote control is turned to the ON
position, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds
while the system performs self-diagnosis. The cruise control system (if active) will
automatically be disengaged if the TCS is
The light under the speedometer operative.
comes on when the TCS is operative, that is
when one of the wheels has lost its grip.
The fact that the TCS is operative indicates
that the limit for grip has been exceeded and
that the driver must exercise greater care.

Electronic Stability How the ESP system works
Program (ESP) 3 The Electronic Stability Program can help to
prevent the car from skidding by braking
Anti-skid system one or several wheels independently of the
driver. The engine output is then also
reduced to prevent the driving wheels from
WARNING spinning. The car has sensors that measure
wheel speed, yaw rate, lateral acceleration,
When driving normally, the ESP system steering wheel position and braking pres-
helps to improve the car’s directional sure. The values provided by these sensors
stability. The ESP must not be regarded are used to calculate the actual direction of
as a system to enable the driver to main- the car, the intentions of the driver and
tain higher speeds. The same precau- whether the ESP should be engaged.
tions must be adopted as normal for safe If this direction does not agree with that
cornering and driving on slippery roads intended by the driver, calculated from the
must be adopted. steering wheel position, the ESP is
engaged.
The Electronic Stability Program employs The ESP improves the driver’s chances
both the antilock braking system (ABS) and Illustration of how the system applies the of retaining control over the car in a critical
the traction control system (TCS). It is a brakes on one or several wheels in order situation.
system that helps the driver to stabilize the to reduce the likelihood of the car skidding
car in unusual circumstances that can oth-
erwise be difficult to handle.

ESP indicator light If a fault is detected in the system, the
When the remote control is turned to the ON following message will be displayed on
position, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds the SID:
while the system performs self-diagnosis.
Stability control failure.
The light under the speedometer Contact Saab dealer.
comes on for a short period of time when the
ESP system is operative.
The cruise control system (if active) will
Operation of the ESP indicates reduced
automatically be disengaged if the ESP is
cohesion between the tires and the road,
operative.
and that extra care should be taken by the
driver.
NOTICE
Turning ESP system off
ESP button The system can be turned off manually with Changes to the chassis, such as a
change of wheels, shock absorbers or
the ESP button, whereupon the light springs, could affect the function of the
under the speedometer will come on. The ESP system.
ESP OFF car must be travelling slower than 35 mph
(60 km/h). The TCS is also disengaged. Always consult a workshop before chang-
lights up under the speedometer if: ing any chassis components. We recom-
The ESP is always engaged during braking, mend that you contact a Saab dealer.
• a fault has been detected and the system even if it has been switched off manually
has therefore been switched off with the ESP button.
• the system has been switched off
manually

Parking brake Parking
WARNING WARNING
• Always apply the parking brake when • Never leave children or pets unat-
you park the car. If the car is to be tended in the car. In warm, sunny
left parked for a long time, refer to weather, the temperature inside the
page 189. car can reach 160–180°F (70–80°C).
• Always apply the parking brake • Park where the vehicle will not create
before removing the remote control. an obstruction or a hazard to other
• Do not use the parking brake while road users.
driving. • Do not park on dry grass or other
Correct hold combustible material. The catalytic
• Grasp the parking brake lever in such
a way that no fingers get trapped when converter gets very hot and could start
you release the parking brake. a fire.
If the parking brake is applied when the car
starts off, the following message will appear • Apply the parking brake, remove the
The parking brake lever is situated between on the SID: remote control and lock the car.
the front seats. The brake acts on the rear
wheels. When the parking brake is applied,
Release parking brake.
the indicator light on the main instru-
ment panel will come on.
To release the parking brake, lift the lever
slightly, pull the release button on the under-
side of the lever and lower the lever.
If conditions allow, it is best if the brake
pedal is not depressed, or only depressed
as little as necessary so as to stop the car
from rolling, when the parking brake is
applied.
To facilitate releasing the parking brake,
depress the brake pedal. This is especially
appropriate if the car is standing on a hill.
NOTICE
Empty the car yourself and bear in mind:
• Never leave a mobile phone, camera,
computer or similar object visible in
the car.
• Clothing, packages and bags attract
thieves.
• Do not leave small objects such as
CDs, sunglasses and coins visible.
• If possible, park in a well-lit, conspicu-
ous parking space.
• Thieves strike whenever and wher- 1 Downhill with curb. 2 Uphill with curb. Turn 3 Uphill or downhill with-
ever they are given the opportunity. Turn the wheels toward the wheels away from the out curb. Turn the wheel
the curb and edge the car curb and edge the car towards the edge of the
forwards until the wheel backward until the wheel road so that the car,
Parking on a hill lightly touches the curb. lightly touches the curb. should it move, will not
When parking on a steep hill, turn the front roll towards the middle of
wheels so that they will be blocked by the the road.
curb if the car should move.
If the car is parked with one front wheel
touching the curb, for example, you may
need to turn the steering wheel slightly
when you insert the remote control to allow
the steering wheel lock to unlock.

Long-term parking • Park the car in a dry, covered and well-
If the car is not going to be used for some ventilated building. Leave the parking
time, e.g. three to four months, the following brake OFF!
steps are recommended: • Convertible: If the car is stored, the soft
top should be closed.
• Drain the washer fluid reservoir and • If necessary, use wheel chocks and leave
hoses. the parking brake off.
• Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber • Disconnect the negative (–) battery lead.
seals on the hood, trunk lid and doors, If frost is likely to occur during the storage
and lubricate them with glycerol period, remove the battery and store it in
(glycerine). a frost-free place.
• After washing the car, dry the brake discs • If it is not possible to stand the car on axle
to avoid corrosion by taking the car out on stands, increase the tire pressure to
the road and applying the brakes a few 43 psi (3 bar).
times.
Leave all the door windows open a crack
• Fill the fuel tank to prevent condensation and cover the car with a non-plastic
forming in it. tarpaulin – not one made of plastic which will
• Top up the coolant and check the anti- not breath.
freeze before the onset of winter.
Saab Parking
Assistance 3
Saab Parking Assistance
WARNING
Responsibility always lies with the driver
when reversing.
• The parking assistance system can
facilitate parking and reversing.
• Bear in mind that small objects, such
as a child lying on the ground, and Area monitored by the sensors seen from Area monitored by the sensors seen from
narrow objects cannot always be the side above
detected by the system.
The system uses four sensors in the rear The system is activated automatically when
Saab Parking Assistance facilitates parking bumper. These emit ultrasound signals that reverse is engaged or selected. Audible
and reversing. There are four sensors in the bounce back to the sensors off any objects confirmation is given and the following text
rear bumper that detect objects up to 6 ft behind the car. The system, however, is shown on the SID:
(1.8 meters) behind the car. cannot always detect small or narrow
If the car is heavily laden, the system may objects, such as a post, since the surface Parking assistance active
falsely indicate that there is an object within area presented to the car is too small.
the detection range. This is since the sen- If a warning message, such as the seatbelt
sors are angled towards the ground when reminder, is shown on the SID when reverse
the car is tail-heavy. is engaged, the audible signals from the
parking assistance system will not be heard
since the warning message has priority.
When the sensors detect an object within
the monitored area, pulses of sound (- - - -)
will be heard. The frequency of these pulses
increases as the car comes closer to the
object.

If you stop the car with reverse gear Cars with trailer hitch
engaged, the sound pulse will stop after If the car has a trailer hitch and its wiring is
2 seconds. The sound pulses will return if NOTICE
correctly connected to the car’s electrical
you continue to reverse. If the car rolls for- The sensors must be kept clean to func- system, the Saab Parking Assistance auto-
ward while reverse is engaged, the system tion well. Ice, snow and dirt can affect matically compensates for the protrusion of
is silenced. their sensitivity. the tow bar.
When the distance to the object is less If a camper or trailer is hitched up and the
than 1 ft. (30 cm), a continuous tone will Large quantities of snow or dirt covering
the sensors can prevent the parking trailer hitch wiring is correctly connected to
be heard. the car’s electrics, the system is automati-
assistance system from detecting any
When an object is approximately 3 ft. objects. cally deactivated.
(90 cm) from the car, the sound pulses You can temporarily deactivate the Saab
change character markedly (frequency Do not spray the sensors with a pressure Parking Assistance as follows:
increases). A distance of about 3 ft. (90 cm) washer, as this can damage them.
is suitable if you wish to load or unload the • Engage reverse and press the CLEAR
trunk. Reversing alongside a wall button on the SID control panel.
If the distance between an object and a If the distance between an object and a The system will be reactivated the next time
corner sensor does not change for corner sensor does not change for you engage reverse.
3 seconds, for example if you are reversing 2 seconds, for example if you are reversing
alongside a wall, the system will switch to alongside a wall, the system will switch to
monitoring straight back. The system indi- monitoring straight back. The system indi-
cates if the distance to the wall decreases cates if the distance to the wall decreases
again. again.
If a trailer is hitched up and correctly con-
nected to the trailer contact by the tow bar,
the system is automatically deactivated.

Error messages The system can be switched off using Explanation of SPA on and SPA off.
If the system malfunctions, the following Profiler.
message will appear on the SID: 1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to SPA on
Parking assistance Profiler. Saab Parking Assistance is activated
malfunction. 2 Select Park Assistance using the automatically when reverse is
Contact Saab dealer. INFO dial. engaged. The system warns of objects
3 Press in the INFO dial. behind the car.
If the system is subject to interference, the 4 Select SPA on or SPA off. If a trailer is hitched up and correctly
following message will be shown on the connected to the trailer connector, the
5 Confirm this selection by pressing the system will be deactivated automati-
SID: INFO dial. cally. You can also deactivate the sys-
tem temporarily with the CLEAR button
Parking assistance sensor Park Assistance if reverse has been engaged and the
interference.
SPA on system is active.
SPA off SPA off
If this message appears, clean the sensors.
The sensors are located in the black trim on Saab Parking Assistance deactivated.
the rear bumper

Economical driving How to read the diagram:
If fuel consumption with the engine at
Factors affecting fuel normal temperature is 28 mpg (10 l/
100 km), the actual fuel consumption
consumption 3 miles (5 km) after the engine has started
The fuel consumption of a car is greatly from cold will be:
affected by driving conditions, climate, road – 23.5 mpg (12 l/100 km) at outside temp.
conditions, speed, driving technique, etc. of 68°F (+20°C) (increase of 20%).
Breaking-in – 17.7 mpg (16 l/100 km) at outside temp.
of 32°F (0°C) (increase of 60%).
Fuel consumption may be somewhat
higher during the break-in period (the – 14 mpg (20 l/100 km) at outside temp.
first 3,000–4,000 miles (5,000–7,000 km)). of –4°F (–20°C) (increase of 100%).
It is clear from the diagram that both dis-
Weather conditions tance driven and outside temperature have
a significant impact on fuel consumption, Percentage increase in fuel consumption
Summer temperatures give better fuel of engine starting from cold compared to
economy than winter ones. The difference after a cold start.
If the car is normally driven on short jour- engine at normal temperature.
can be as much as about 10%. Consump-
tion increases in cold weather because the neys, 3–5 miles (5–8 km), for example to
engine takes longer to reach its normal and from work, the average consumption
operating temperature. The transmission will be 60–80% above the normal level.
and wheel bearings also take longer to
Driving techniques
warm up. Even distance affects consump- • To obtain the best running economy, with
tion: short journeys of 3–5 miles (5–8 km) regard to fuel consumption and general
do not give the engine enough time to wear, the car must be serviced regularly.
reach its optimum temperature. Wind con- • High speed, unnecessary acceleration,
ditions also have a marked effect on fuel frequent braking and much changing
consumption. down all give higher fuel consumption.
• Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting
in cold weather, the use of studded tires
and roof racks, and towing a camper all
increase fuel consumption.
• Do not warm up the engine while the car
is stationary.
If idling, the engine will take much longer
to reach its optimum temperature, and

engine wear is at its greatest during this • Check the fuel consumption regularly. Engine block heater 3
period. Drive off as soon as possible after Increased fuel consumption can indicate The following are just some of the benefits
starting the engine and avoid high engine that something is wrong and that the car to the car and the environment of using an
speeds. needs to be checked. We recommend engine block heater:
• Drive as smoothly and thoughtfully as that you contact a Saab dealer.
possible. Match your driving to the prevail- Practical road tests have demonstrated that • Lower fuel consumption.
ing traffic conditions. substantial savings in fuel consumption can • Reduced wear on the engine.
• Driving in a low gear gives rise to higher be made if the above advice is followed. • Inside of car warms up faster.
fuel consumption than driving in a high • Exhaust emissions substantially reduced
gear because of the higher engine speed over short runs.
for any given road speed. Always shift up
WARNING
The engine heater is effective at outside
as soon as traffic conditions allow and temperatures up to 60–70°F (+15–+20°C).
Never switch off the engine while driving
drive in the highest gear as much as The warmer it is outside, the shorter the time
possible. as the effect of the brakes and power
steering will be greatly reduced. the engine heater needs to be connected.
• Check the tire pressure once a month. Longer than 1.5 hours is unnecessary.
Incorrect tire pressure increases tire If the car is equipped with a removable,
wear. It is preferable for the tire pressure Road conditions electric cabin heater that is not in use, store
to be slightly high than too low. Under- Wet roads increase fuel consumption, as do this in the trunk.
pressure increases fuel consumption. unpaved roads and driving in hilly country
(the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is
less than the additional amount required to
climb the hill).

Driving in cold weather Condensation is caused by temperature
fluctuations, either in the outside temper-
In cold weather, special attention should be ature alone or when the car is alternately
paid to the following: parked outdoors and in a garage.
• Before driving off, make sure that the • Convertible: Avoid operating the soft top
wiper blades have not frozen to the wind- at temperatures below 23°F (–5°C).
shield. • The car is equipped with tires designed to
• Remove any snow from the heating provide optimum grip on both wet and dry
system air intakes between the hood and roads, although this has been achieved at
the windshield. the expense of somewhat reduced grip on
snow and ice. For regular driving on snow
• If necessary, inject oil into the locks to and ice, we therefore recommend that
prevent them from freezing. Use molyb-
winter tires be fitted. However, winter tires
denum-sulphide oil (MoS2). If the locks
achieve this extra grip at the expense of
freeze, exercise care when unlocking the grip on bare road surfaces.
car (manual unlocking) to avoid breaking
the key. Warm up the key or use a de-icer. Winter tires, particularly studded tires, gen-
erally make driving safer on snow and ice.
• It is particularly important when the roads
are slippery that the brakes and tires are Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
in good condition. sions governing the use of different
types of winter tires and snow chains.
• For how to check the level of antifreeze in Studded tires are not allowed in some
the engine coolant, see page 222. countries. If winter tires are fitted, the same
• Add gasoline anti-freeze when refueling type must be fitted to all four wheels. Your
several times before the onset of winter. Saab dealer will be pleased to advise you on
This will prevent condensation water in the best tires for your car.
the fuel tank from freezing and causing
interruptions in the fuel supply. The likeli-
hood of condensation is lowest when the
fuel tank is full.
If the car is parked outside and the
temperature is below zero, gasoline anti-
freeze is of little use as it cannot remove
water that has already frozen. Park the
car in a warm place so that any ice that
may have built up melts, then add gaso-
line anti-freeze when refueling.

Remember that tires age: it may therefore Driving with tire chains 3
be necessary to change winter tires before Snow chains must only be fitted to the wheel
they reach the legal wear limit, as they grad- and tire dimensions that Saab recommends
ually lose their friction properties with age. in "Technical data" on page 293.
If you get into a front wheel skid and the car We recommend that you contact a Saab
has a manual transmission, the best dealer regarding approved tire chains. See
response is to freewheel, which means also page 263.
declutching so that the wheels neither drive
nor brake, and to cautiously steer in the
desired direction. WARNING
If the car has automatic transmission, ease
off the accelerator slightly and steer cau- • Do not drive at speeds above 30 mph
tiously in the desired direction. (50 km/h) when tire chains are fitted.
If you get into a rear wheel skid, steer in the • Tire chains can reduce directional
same direction as the movement of the rear stability.
of the car.
• Do not fit tire chains to the car’s rear
wheels.
NOTICE
• Check the links frequently for wear.
• Check that the chains do not foul the
wheel arch liner at full lock.
• Refer to the "Technical data" section
on page 293, for information on wheel
and tire dimensions approved for the
fitting of tire chains.

Driving in hot climates 2 If the engine is idling and the needle on
the temperature gauge falls, wait until a
Always check the coolant level before start- normal temperature is shown (about in
ing a journey. When the engine is cold, the the middle of the scale) before switching
coolant must not lie above the KALT/COLD off the engine. If the coolant needs to be
mark on the expansion tank (boundary topped up, carefully unscrew the
between the upper and lower sections of the expansion tank cap.
tank). Fill as required with a mixture of 50 %
At the end of a journey, allow the engine to antifreeze and 50 % clean water. Use an
idle for 2–3 minutes before switching it off. antifreeze approved by Saab.
If the needle on the temperature gauge
enters the red zone, the following message WARNING
will be shown on the SID:
Hot engine. • Exercise care when opening the hood
Make a safe stop. if the engine is overheated. Never
Run engine on idle. remove the expansion tank cap
completely when the engine is hot.
1 Stop the car but do not switch off the • The cooling system is pressurized -
engine. Do not remove the cap on the hot coolant and vapour can escape.
cooling system expansion tank, even if These can cause injury to your eyes
the tank is empty. The engine tempera- and burns. Open the cap slowly to
ture should decrease. If the temperature release the pressure before removing
continues to rise with the engine idling, it.
the engine must be switched off.
3 Have the car’s cooling system checked.
We recommend that you contact a Saab
dealer.
Towing a trailer 3 Trailer hitch attachment 3

Trailer hitch attachments are available as
accessories. These are designed for a max-
WARNING imum trailer weight of 3500 lbs (1588 kg),
with trailer brakes.
• Do not drive with a trailer on inclines An electrical connection 3 for the towbar
steeper than 15 %. The load on the and an electrical unit are provided in the
drive (front) wheels will be so low that electrical centre on the left-hand side of the
the wheels can start to spin and luggage compartment.
prevent further progress. The Saab genuine electrical socket enables
• In addition, the car’s parking brake a battery in the trailer on tow to be charged
may not always be sufficient to hold while driving. Also, if the car has SPA, this
the car and trailer securely, as the is deactivated automatically if a trailer is
wheels may start to slide. hitched up and correctly connected to the
Saab genuine trailer socket.
• Always apply the trailer’s parking
brake when unhitching it. There is Saab recommendations:
otherwise a risk of personal injury or • Use a genuine Saab trailer hitch that is
damage to the bumper should the designed and tested for your Saab.
trailer start to roll.
• When you hitch up the trailer be sure • Contact your Saab dealer for advice on
to attach its safety chains to the holes which trailer hitch is designed for your car.
by the hitch.
Make sure you are familiar with the legal

requirements regarding speed limits for
towing, maximum trailer weights, trailer
braking requirements, and also any spe-
cial driving licence provisions.

The following driving time limits are based The following message will be displayed on
NOTICE on the capacity of the cooling system in hot the SID if the transmission fluid becomes
weather, i.e. approximately 104°F (+40°C). too hot:
• We recommend you to use a genuine
Saab trailer hitch, since other models Gradient of Max. trailer Time limit, Gearbox too hot.
can damage the car’s bodywork and hill, % weight, lbs. minutes Make a safe stop.
electrical system. (kg) Open hood to cool down.
6-8 2200 (1000) unlimited
• We recommend that you contact a If this message appears, stop the car as
Saab dealer for guidance on how to 9-11 1760 (800) max. 15
soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
connect a trailer hitch. 12-14 1100 (500) max. 15 engine to idle until the message has gone
max. 15 880 (400) max. 15 out. The selector lever should be in
• Exercise care when driving on uneven position P.
roads or against the curb if the car is
heavily laden. This particularly applies When negotiating long hills, bear the follow- When continuing your journey, manually
to cars with 17" wheels. ing important considerations in mind. select a low gear in which the engine speed
is about 3,500 rpm until the incline eases
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated (see page 178).
Recommendations for cars with by the temperature gauge in the main instru-
ment panel.
automatic transmission
The following steps are taken in order as the WARNING
The following driving time limits are based
temperature of the transmission increases:
on the capacity of the cooling system in hot Remember to use engine-braking (selec-
weather, i.e. approximately 86°F (+30°C). • Gear change pattern is altered tor position M1, M2, or M3) to spare the
Gradient of Max. trailer Time limit, • A/C compressor is switched off brakes when you are driving on a long or
hill, % weight, lbs. minutes • Max. engine torque is reduced steep downhill slope.
(kg) Overheating can cause the brakes to
6-8 3330 (1500) unlimited fade!
9-11 3080 (1400) max. 15
12-14 2645 (1200) max. 15
max. 15 2200 (1000) max. 15

Recommendations for cars with Trailer hitch load
manual transmission The weight distribution on the trailer makes
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated a lot of difference to the handling properties
by the temperature gauge in the main instru- of the car and trailer combination. With a
ment panel. two-wheel trailer, concentrate the load over
When the needle is just outside the red the wheels and keep it as low as possible.
zone, the A/C compressor will be switched The trailer should be loaded so that the load
off and, on certain engine variants, the max- on the towball is 110–165 lbs. (50–75 kg).
imum engine torque will be limited. Note that this load must be included in the
When continuing your journey, select a low total load for the car. If this now exceeds the
gear in which the engine speed is about specified load capacity, the load in the trunk
3,500 rpm until the incline eases. may have to be reduced by the correspond-
ing amount.
Distribution of load in trailer
WARNING
a Light
Remember to use engine-braking (selec- b Moderate
tor position 1, 2, or 3) to spare the brakes c Heavy
when you are driving on a long or steep
downhill slope.
Overheating can cause the brakes to
fade!

Checks before driving Driving considerations Reversing
Make sure that the car and trailer are in Always take extra care when towing a Get someone to help you keep an eye out
good working order. This is essential since trailer, as the car’s handling will be different behind the trailer as the door mirrors do not
towing a trailer increases the strain on the and its braking performance reduced. The always provide sufficient rearward vision
car. trailer’s braking system and suspension when reversing.
also have a considerable effect on these
• Check and if necessary adjust the tire characteristics. See also "Driving with a
pressure of the car and trailer. load" on page 204.
• Make sure all wheel bolts are properly Drive carefully:
tightened.
• Make sure that the equipment joining the • descending hills
car and trailer is properly secured and • on uneven roads
adjusted. • over railway crossings
• Make sure the trailer’s electrical cable is • when meeting large vehicles
properly connected and is not so long that If the car has automatic transmission, select
it drags along the ground. Also, make sure gear M1 when ascending or descending
the cable is not too short and risks break- steep hills.
ing when turning a corner.
• Check all bulbs.
• Check the car and trailer brakes.
• Make sure that all items on or in the
camper or trailer are properly secured.
• Make sure that the trailer’s jockey wheel is
raised and locked.
• Check the distribution of the load so that
the car and trailer are well balanced.
• Check that the rearview mirrors provide
the best possible rearward vision.
• Make sure the trailer’s safety cable is
correctly attached.
Driving with a roof rack Fitting roof carriers 3

load Sport Sedan and SportCombi without
roof rails
1 Open the four covers on the roof of the
WARNING car.
• A roof load will affect the car’s center 2 Insert a screw with washer into each roof
of gravity and aerodynamics. Be carrier foot. Fit a seal onto each screw.
aware of this when cornering and driv- 3 The roof carriers are marked front and
ing in crosswinds. back.
• Adjust your speed to the prevailing 4 Bolt the roof carriers to the brackets in
conditions. the roof.
5 Check that the roof carriers are firmly
• Due to higher aerodynamics drag, fuel mounted. Mounting holes for roof carrier
economy may suffer when driving with
a roof rack.
The maximum permissible roof load is

220 lbs. (100 kg). Note that the roof load
must be included in the car’s maximum per-
missible payload and axle load.
Strong, sturdy roof carriers designed spe-
cially for your car are available from your
Saab dealer. Always secure roof loads
securely.

Fitting roof carriers 3
SportCombi with roof rails
1 Clean the car’s roof rails.
2 Check the markings on the cross
members to see which is the front and
which is the rear roof carrier.
3 Place the cross members on the roof
rails, on their respective sides of the
centre supports. The cross members
must not be placed beyond the front or
rear joint on the rail. Ensure that the
distance between the cross members is
at least 700 mm.
If a roof box is to be fitted, the cross
members must be positioned so that the
tailgate can be opened fully without
hitting the roof box.
4 Using your thumb, press the bracket
so that it lies snugly against the
outside of the roof rail. Make sure that
the roof carriers are seated centrally on
the rubber spacers and that these sit
correctly on the roof rail. Pull the spacers
down slightly on the inside of the roof
rail.
5 Centre the roof carriers so that they
protrude equally on both sides.
6 Tighten the roof carriers by hand.
Ensure that the tightening knobs are
upright once the roof carriers have been
tightened.
7 Make sure the roof carriers are securely
in place.
Driving with a load Driving with the trunk lid Driving in deep water
The handling characteristics are affected by
how the car is loaded.
open
NOTICE
NOTICE WARNING Do not drive in puddles or water deeper

than 7 in. (20 cm) and do not drive faster
• Place the heaviest load as far forward Avoid driving with the trunk lid partly or than 3–4 mph. Water can otherwise be
and as low as possible in the trunk. fully open, since exhaust fumes can be sucked into the engine. The engine will be
drawn into the cabin. seriously damaged if water enters the
• Secure the load to the lashing eyes intake system.
(see page 149).
If you must drive with the trunk lid open,
• Heavy loads mean that the car’s close all windows and the sunroof (if
center of gravity is further back. As a equipped) and set the cabin fan to its high-
result, the car will sway more during est speed setting.
evasive steering.
• Never exceed the permissible load of
the roof box, even if there is room for
more.
• Ensure that the tire pressure is correct
– slight overinflation is preferable to
underinflation.
• The braking distance of a loaded car is
always greater. Keep your distance
from the vehicle in front.
• Do not exceed the car’s permissible
gross vehicle weight or axle load (see
page 294).
• Roof loads can negatively affect tele-
communication.
For further information on tires see
page 256.

Driving at night Towing the car Front towing eye
Bear in mind the following points, especially
when driving at night: WARNING
WARNING
• Nighttime driving requires your full • Make sure that the towing eye is
concentration • Remember that the brake servo does
not operate when the engine is off. screwed in tightly. It has a left-hand
• Do not rush. Count on your journey taking thread!
slightly longer. Much greater pressure than normal
will therefore be required to operate • The towing eye is only designed for
• The number of drivers under the influence the brake pedal. towing the car on roads. It must not
of drugs is likely to be greater at night than
• Nor does the steering servo operate be used to pull the car out of a ditch,
during the day.
when the engine is off. The steering for example.
• Do not stare at the headlights of oncom-
ing vehicles. will therefore be much heavier than • Make sure that all bystanders keep a
usual. suitable distance, in case the towing
• Avoid driving at night if you have poor
• The towing vehicle should always be eye or tow rope should snap. The
eyesight. Night vision deteriorates with
heavier than the vehicle on tow. towing eye or tow rope could catapult
age.
off and cause seriously injury.
• Keep your car’s headlights, windows and • Never allow passengers to ride in the
mirrors clean. Also, if you wear glasses, car when it is on tow. • Never drive with the towing eye fitted
make sure they are clean. to the front bumper. Return it to its
• Always seek professional help if the designated storage space.
• Make sure you are well rested before car needs to be recovered.
starting a long journey. Take a break every
other hour. • The ignition switch must be in the ON
• Only eat light meals. Heavy meals have a position if the car is moved with the
tendency to induce tiredness. engine not running.
• Wild animals prefer to move at dusk and • The steering wheel lock must be
dawn. disengaged before towing the car.
• Check the headlight levelling setting (see
page 102). • The steering wheel lock disengages
when the remote control is inserted
into the ignition switch, if the battery
has sufficient charge.
Front towing eye fitted. Rear towing eye Never use the towing eyes to pull the car
The towing eye has a left-hand thread! unstuck.
The front towing eye is stowed by the spare Rear towing eye Towing the car
wheel. On the left-hand side of the bumper The car has a permanent towing eye at the
is a cover concealing the attachment point rear under the bumper. NOTICE
(tapped hole) for the towing eye. If the car is equipped with a towbar, this can
1 Press the knob on the upper section of be used instead of the towing eye. Never use the towing eyes to pull the car
this cover at the same time as pulling out unstuck.
the lower edge.
2 Screw in the towing eye. The towing Engage neutral (automatic transmission:
eye has a left-hand thread! move the selector lever to N). Turn on the
3 Insert the wheel wrench into the eye to parking lights.
tighten it properly. Drive carefully and do not exceed the
To refit the cover: Start by inserting the top speed limit for vehicles on tow.
edge of the cover. Then click in the lower
edge, one corner at a time.

Always try to keep the towrope taut by Transporting the car
gently applying the brake of the car on tow,
as necessary. This will avoid the towrope
being jerked violently. NOTICE
Cars with automatic transmission: If a car with sports (lowered) chassis is

transported, for example on a flat bed
truck, take extra care not to damage the
NOTICE spoiler and/or underbody.
• The car must be towed front first.
• If the car is to be towed with the front
wheels off the ground, make sure the
parking brake is off, as this acts on the
rear wheels. Attachment points for anchorage straps
Always observe the speed limit for vehicles

on tow. Whatever the speed limit, the car
must not be towed at speeds exceeding
30 mph (50 km/h) nor for a distance of more
than 30 miles (50 km). If the car needs to be
transported over a longer distance, a tow
Vehicle recovery
truck or flatbed truck must be called out. If the car has to be transported on a flatbed
The engine cannot be started by towing or truck, or similar, it must be securely
pushing the car. In an emergency, the strapped down. There are attachment
engine can be started as described under points for this purpose on the underside of
"Jump starting" on page 208. the car. The attachment points are oblong
hole that have been reinforced to cope with
the stresses that arise during this type of
transport.
Driving with the Important considerations when driving with

a compact spare tire:
Jump starting
compact spare tire • The car’s ground clearance is reduced.
• The car must not be driven with more than WARNING
WARNING one compact spare tire at a time.
• When working on the battery, highly
• Avoid driving against the curb. explosive gas can build up. A spark
• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). The • Do not use snow chains. could ignite this gas that collects
tire can overheat affecting the car’s • Do not fit the wheel cover - this would around the battery. Therefore, always
roadholding. conceal the warning text. avoid sparks and open flames in the
• Tire pressure: refer to page 304. vicinity of the battery.
• The spare tire or punctured tire must NOTICE • The battery contains corrosive sulphu-
be stowed under the trunk floor, and ric acid. Always wear a face mask or
secured in place with the retaining nut. To avoid damaging a alloy wheel of a goggles when working on the battery.
punctured tire, this can be temporarily • If battery acid gets into the eyes or
placed outside up in the spare wheel well splashes onto skin or clothing, wash
Observe the following when the compact
but only while driving to the closest work- the affected area liberally with water. If
spare tire is fitted: shop. acid gets into the eyes or a large quan-
• The compact spare is light and easy to As a general rule, all heavy loads must be tity makes contact with the skin, seek
handle when changing a tire. well secured in the trunk (see page 149). medical help.
• Do not drive further than necessary with
the compact spare fitted - the maximum
life of the tire is only just over 2,000 miles
(approx. 3,500 km).
• Refit the standard tire as soon as possi-
ble.
NOTICE NOTICE
Ignoring these steps could result in costly If the other system is not a 12-volt system
damage to your vehicle that would not be with a negative ground, both vehicles can
covered by your warranty. be damaged.
Trying to start your car by pushing or pull-
ing it could damage your vehicle, even if 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the
you have a manual transmission. If you jumper cables can reach, but be sure the
have an automatic transmission, your vehicles are not touching each other. If a
vehicle cannot be started by pushing or poor connection on the negative jumper
pulling it. cable should exist, it is possible for
damage to be caused to electrical
It is essential when a donor battery is to be systems/components of either vehicle Jump starting
used to jump start the car that the jump should inadvertent contact be made.
leads be connected correctly to prevent You would not be able to start your car
arcing. and bad grounding could damage the
electrical systems. NOTICE
To jump start your vehicle:
1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a If you leave your radio on, it could be
12-volt battery with a negative ground WARNING badly damaged. The repairs would not be
system. covered by your warranty.
You could be injured if the vehicles roll.
Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
cle. Put an automatic transmission in P 4 Open the hood and locate the battery.
(Park) or a manual transmission in Find the positive (+) and negative (–) termi-
Neutral. nals on the battery.
3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. WARNING

Turn off lights that are not needed, and
radios. This will avoid sparks and help An electric fan can start up even when the
save both batteries and it could save engine is not running and can injure you.
your radio. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.

7 Do not let the other end touch metal. Using a battery charger 3/starter
Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of unit
WARNING the good battery. Use a remote positive
To avoid damaging the car’s electrical
(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Using a match or flame of any kind near a system and electronics, the following rules
8 Now connect the negative (–) cable to must be followed when charging the battery
battery can cause battery gas to explode. the good battery’s negative terminal.
You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a or jump starting the car.
flashlight if you need more light. 9 Attach the cable to the discharged
battery’s negative terminal. • If the charger or starter unit can be set to
Be sure the electrolyte in the battery is not different voltages (6V/12V/18V/24V), 12V
10 Start the vehicle with the good battery
frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze. must be selected.
and run the engine for a while.
When connecting jumper cables to a • Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
frozen battery, gas from the chemical 11 Try to start the vehicle with the
supplied with the charger or starter unit.
reaction inside the battery can build up discharged battery. If it does not start
after a few tries, it probably needs • No other apparatus that are grounded or
under the ice and cause an explosion. connected to the mains must be
service.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn Note. If the current in the low battery is connected to the car during charging or
you. Do not get it on you. If you acciden- too low it might be necessary to wait jump starting.
tally get it in your eyes or on your skin, several minutes with the cables • The charger or starter unit must under no
flush the area with water and get medical connected before you can start the conditions produce a voltage greater
help immediately. engine with the low battery. than:
12 Remove the cables in reverse order to • 16V continuous
5 Check that the jumper cables do not prevent electrical shorting. Take care • 18V for 60 min.
have loose or missing insulation. If they that they do not touch each other or any If you are unsure about the charge rating of
do, you could get a shock and also the other metal. the unit, disconnect the battery clamp from
vehicles could be damaged. the positive terminal before connecting the
Before you connect the cables, here are unit to the battery.
some basic things you should know.
Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and
negative (–) will go to negative (–). Do
not connect (+) to (–) or you will get a
short that could injure you or would
damage the battery and maybe other
parts as well.
6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.

For long trips
Before starting off on a long journey, it is
advisable to have your car inspected by
your Saab dealer.
Obtain a few important items to take along
on your journey, such as spare bulbs, wiper
blades, fuses, a drive belt (poly-V-belt) and
the like.
You can check some points yourself before-
hand:
• Check that no oil or fuel leaks out of the
engine or gearbox/transmission.
• Check the coolant and power steering
fluid levels. Check also for leaks.
• Inspect the drive belt (poly-V-belt) and
replace if it shows any signs of wear.
• Check the battery charge.
• Check the tires for tread pattern and air
pressure, including the compact spare
tire.
• Take an extra remote control and keep it
separate.
• Check the brakes.
• Check all bulbs.
• Check for the presence of the tool kit and
jack in the car.

Car care 213
Car care
Hood ________________ 214 Fuses ________________ 247

Engine ______________ 215 Automatic tire pressure
Engine bay, 4-cyl engine 217 monitoring 3_________ 254
Engine oil ____________ 219 Tires _________________ 256
Air filter______________ 222 Compact spare ________ 270
Transmission fluid ____ 222 Changing a tire ________ 273
Coolant ______________ 222 Safety belts ___________ 276
Brake/clutch fluid and Upholstery and trim ____ 276
brake pads__________ 224 Textile carpeting _______ 277
Power steering________ 225 Engine bay____________ 277
Battery ______________ 226 Washing ______________ 277
Drive belt ____________ 229 Waxing and polishing ___ 279
Wipers and washers ___ 230 Touching up the paint___ 279
Wiper blades _________ 230 Anti-corrosion treatment 280
Changing bulbs _______ 232 Recovery and/or
recycling of automotive
materials ____________ 282
Air conditioning (A/C) ___ 282
214 Car care
Hood
The hood release handle is located on the
left under the instrument panel. Open the
hood in the following way:
1 Pull the release handle.
2 The hood moves to the half-locked posi-
tion and is stopped by a safety catch at
the front edge.
3 Press the lever of the catch upwards and
raise the hood.
When you close the hood you should drop it
from a height of about 12 inches (30 cm),
without slamming it. Hood release handle Hood release catch plate
Car care 215

Engine adjusted to achieve optimum functionality.
The switches are hydraulic.
Emission control
Turbo petrol engine systems
Engine families
The engine is a transverse four-cylinder in- The systems for controlling emissions to the
Saab cars imported into the United States atmosphere require regular checking and
line engine with twin overhead camshafts and Canada meet all applicable emission
and 16 valves. adjustment at the intervals specified in the
control standards. The engine family and service program.
The engine is equipped with two balance- appropriate tune-up specifications are iden-
shafts that reduce engine vibrations to a tified on a label in the engine bay. In addition to meeting the exhaust emission
minimum. regulations and thereby helping to keep the
These engine families meet applicable EPA environment clean, a correctly tuned engine
The balance shafts are chain-driven and Federal Standards, California State Stan- will also give maximum fuel economy.
rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft. dards and Canadian Federal Standards and
They produce forces and torques that are are equipped with the following systems:
opposed to those generated by the pistons WARNING
and connecting rods. The effect occurs • sequential multiport fuel injection system
twice in each revolution of the engine, coun- • three way catalytic converter Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
teracting the vibration from its moving parts, • crankcase emissions control system and certain vehicle components contain
and at the same time reducing unwanted • evaporative emission system. or emit chemicals known to the State of
engine noise. California to cause cancer and birth
The gearbox, located on the right (viewed defects and reproductive harm. In addi-
from the front), is integrated with the engine. tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
Petrol engine, V6 contain or emit chemicals known to the
The V6 engine is a turbocharged V6 engine State of California to cause cancer and
produced completely of aluminium with 60° birth defects or other reproductive harm.
between the cylinder banks, 4 valves per
cylinder, 2 camshafts per bank.
The camshafts are driven via a chain trans-
mission. The engine is equipped with a
turbo whose turbine collects exhaust pres-
sure from both banks of cylinders.
To obtain optimum performance, fuel con-
sumption and low emission levels the
engine is equipped with CVCP (Continuous
Variable Cam Phasing). This means that
the engine’s intake camshafts can be
216 Car care

Saab Trionic engine ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor
management system NOTICE Recovery)
The Saab Trionic engine management All hydrocarbons formed when refueling will
system is a unique Saab development that The Trionic engine management system be recovered by the car and not released
combines sequential multiport fuel injection, continuously monitors the operation of into the atmosphere. The hydrocarbons are
electronic distributorless ignition and turbo- these systems and has on-board diag- absorbed in an evaporative emission canis-
charger boost pressure control into one sys- nostic capabilities (OBD II). If the Engine ter. When the engine is subsequently
tem. malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) light in started, the evaporative emission canister is
The Trionic engine control module (ECM) the main instrument illuminates, the gradually purged as air is sucked into it
monitors many different engine parameters Trionic ECM has detected a problem. The through a shut-off valve. The hydrocar-
such as: car will continue to operate, but perfor- bon/air mixture passes through the evap
mance may be diminished. You should canister purge valve and into the engine
• Intake manifold pressure. have your car checked by a Saab dealer where it is burned. “Refueling”, see
• Intake air temperature. as soon as possible. page 167.
• Crankshaft position. When refueling, make sure you screw the
• Engine coolant temperature. filler cap on and keep turning until it has
clicked 3 times.
• Throttle position.
• The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.
The ECM receives information regarding
engine knocking from a sophisticated feed-
back function in the ignition discharge unit.
By processing all of this information, the Tri-
onic system can control fuel injector open-
ing duration, ignition timing and turbo-
charger boost pressure to provide excellent
engine performance while maintaining low
emissions and fuel consumption.
Car care 217

Engine bay, 4-cyl engine
1 Oil filler cap

2 Coolant reservoir
3 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir
4 Battery
5 Fuse box
6 Washer-fluid reservoir
7 Power-steering fluid reservoir
8 Engine-oil dipstick
218 Car care
Engine bay, V6 engine
1 Power-steering fluid resrvoir

2 Coolant reservoir
3 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir
4 Battery
5 Fuse box
6 Washer-fluid reservoir
7 Oil filler cap
8 Engine-oil dipstick
Car care 219

Engine oil
Checking the oil level
Check the engine oil level regularly.
1 Park the car on a level ground.
2 Switch off the engine and wait for
2–5 minutes. The engine should be at
normal operating temperature.
3 Take the dipstick out and wipe it off with
a clean rag before carrying out the
check.
The level must not be below the MIN mark
on the dipstick, but nor should it be above Oil filler cap and dipstick, 4-cyl engine Oil filler cap and dipstick, V6 engine
the MAX mark. Excess engine oil could
result in abnormal oil consumption.
The distance between the MIN and MAX
marks is equivalent to 1.0 qt (1.0 l). 2.0 Turbo (210 hk): The engine oil level is V6: The engine has an oil level sensor that
checked each time the engine is started. If checks the oil level when the engine is
the oil level is low, the following message running. If the oil level drops too low, the
NOTICE appears on the SID: following message appears on the SID:
Too high oil level can damage the engine.
Low engine oil level. Low engine oil level.
Fill oil now. Fill oil now.
f this occurs the oil level must be checked f this occurs the oil level must be checked
first. If the level is too low then it must be first. If the level is too low then it must be
topped up. topped up.
220 Car care

Make sure you screw on the oil filler cap Changing engine oil Engine oil and oil filter should be changed
properly after topping up the oil to avoid according to the service program.
running problems. For oil volumes and grades, refer to
It is normal for an engine to consume a cer- WARNING page 298.
tain amount of oil. It is therefore often nec- The oil should be drained when the engine
essary to top up the oil between services. • Prolonged and repeated exposure of is warm. The car must stand on level
Check the engine oil level regularly. the skin to engine oil can cause seri- ground.
During the Break-in Period (approx. ous skin disorders. Avoid prolonged
skin contact whenever possible. 1 Unscrew the drain plug in the bottom of
3,000 miles or 5,000 km) and when driving the sump and leave the oil to drain into a
at high speeds or with a trailer, the oil con- • Used engine oil contains chemicals suitable receptacle for at least
sumption may be higher than normal. that have caused cancer in laboratory 10 minutes. Take care, as the oil may be
animals. Always protect your skin by hot.
washing thoroughly with soap and
NOTICE water. 2 Refit the drain plug with a new washer.
3 Change the oil filter once the engine oil
Change of engine oil and oil filter may be • Keep oil out of reach of children. has drained (see page 221).
required more frequently if the car is
• Do not touch the turbocharger or 4 Fill with new oil.
being used under certain conditions, see
exhaust manifold. These get very hot Run the engine to normal temperature and
page 289. when the engine has been running. check the oil level.
• Do not spill oil on hot parts of the
engine as this could cause a fire. Used
engine oil is particularly flammable.
• Protect the environment. Do not
dispose of oil into the ground or down
a drain. Dispose of all used oil and
oil filters at an appropriate disposal
facility.
Car care 221

Changing filter, 4-cyl engine
1 Unscrew the oil filter cap.
• Lift the cap slightly and carefully pry
apart the cap and the filter housing.
• Remove the filter cap.
2 Remove the filter. Have paper towelling
or a rag at hand to catch the oil that
escapes from the filter.
3 Fit a new filter.
4 Fit a new O-ring in the cap. Apply a small
amount of new engine oil to the O-ring.
5 Screw on the cap. The correct tightening
Drain plug, 4-cyl engine torque is 25 Nm (18 lbf. ft). Oil filter, 4-cyl engine
Changing filter, V6 engine
1 Unscrew the oil filter cap. Have paper
towelling or a rag at hand to catch the oil
that escapes from the filter.
2 Remove the cap and the filter.
Drain plug, V6 engine 3 Change the O-ring in the cap. Lubricate Oil filter, V6 engine
this with a small amount of new engine
oil.
4 Fit a new filter.
5 Screw on the cap. The correct tightening
torque is 25 Nm (18 lbf ft).
222 Car care
Air filter Coolant The coolant contains 45 % antifreeze and

anti-corrosion fluid. This ratio gives the best
cooling effect. Lower concentrations should
WARNING WARNING be avoided, in view of the corrosion risk.
Other brands of antifreeze can damage the
To ensure reliable operation, only use • Proceed with caution if the radiator is engine and cooling system.
an air filter recommended by Saab boiling when you open the hood.
Automobile AB. Never remove the expansion-tank NOTICE
filler cap when the radiator is boiling.
• The cooling system is pressurized – If the cooling system needs topping up,
Transmission fluid hot coolant and vapor can escape mix the antifreeze with the appropriate
when the filler cap is released. These quantity of drinking water or distilled
Manual transmission can cause injury to your eyes and water before adding it to the system.
Check and top up the oil in accordance with burns. Loosen the cap carefully, and If undiluted antifreeze is added, the
the service program. let the engine cool before removing engine could still freeze and be damaged.
the cap. This is because the antifreeze will not mix
Automatic transmission • Exercise care when adding coolant. properly with the coolant before the ther-
Check and top up the oil in accordance with Coolant on hot surfaces constitutes a mostat has opened to allow full circula-
the service program. fire risk. tion.
If the coolant level drops too low, the follow- Note:

ing message appears on the SID: If incorrect coolant is used or added, the life-
time properties will be affected. Even if the
Coolant level low. coolant is flushed from the system and
Refill. replaced with life-time coolant, life-time
properties are no longer retained and the
coolant must then be drained and replaced
The properties of the coolant are retained at regular intervals.
for the entire service life of the car. There-
fore, it is not necessary to change the cool-
ant.
Car care 223
Coolant expansion tank, 4-cyl engine Coolant expansion tank, V6 engine Level markings, V6 engine
1 MAX
2 MIN
4-cyl engine: The expansion tank is trans- V6 engine: The expansion tank is not trans-
parent to facilitate checking the coolant parent. The cap must be unscrewed so that
level. the coolant level can be checked. When the
When the engine is cold, the coolant must cap is screwed off there are two level mark-
not lie above the KALT/COLD mark on the ings, MIN and MAX
expansion tank (boundary between the
upper and lower sections of the tank, see
illustration).
Top up with a mixture of equal parts of anti-
freeze and clean water. We recommend
that you use a Saab-approved anti-freeze.
If the expansion tank is empty when coolant
is added, run the engine until warm so that
the thermostat opens. Top up the tank
again, as necessary.
224 Car care
Brake/clutch fluid and If the level drops too low, the following
message appears on the SID:
brake pads
Brake fluid level low.
Make a safe stop.
WARNING Contact Saab dealer.
Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes Top up as necessary with DOT 4 brake

old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs fluid. Do not use DOT 5 fluid.
water from the air and, in time, could allow Use only new brake fluid from a sealed
vapor to form in the brake system, thus container.
reducing its performance. It is therefore
The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as
important that brake fluid be changed
the brake pads wear. The MAX level in the
regularly, as specified in the service
reservoir corresponds to the amount of Brake fluid reservoir
program.
brake fluid required with new brake pads. If
the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to
Checking normal brake pad wear, topping up is not
Brake fluid should be changed according to necessary.
the service program. Refer to the Warranty If the brake fluid should require chang- NOTICE
and Service Book. ing, this must be carried out at a Saab
dealer. We recommend that you contact Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,
The brake and clutch fluid reservoir is trans- since it can cause the paint to bubble and
parent to facilitate checking of the fluid level. a Saab dealer.
lift. If any brake fluid is spilled, the area
The fluid level should lie between the MAX The foot brake and parking brake are self- should be flushed with large quantities of
and MIN marks. adjusting. water as quickly as possible.
It is not possible to detect, through abnormal
pedal or parking brake lever travel, whether
the brake pads are worn and need replac- Brake pads should only be changed at a
ing. It is therefore essential that brake pads workshop. We recommend that you con-
be checked regularly, as specified in the tact a Saab dealer. To ensure optimum
service program. brake performance we recommend the
use of Saab genuine brake pads.
Car care 225

Power steering
WARNING
Power steering fluid on hot engine
components constitutes a fire risk.
Check the level of the power steering fluid in

the reservoir regularly, in accordance with
the service program.
The wheels should point directly forwards
during this check.
Clean round the cap before unscrewing it. Power steering fluid reservoir, 4-cyl Power steering fluid reservoir, V6 engine
Wipe the dipstick. To check the level, screw engine
down the cap completely and then remove
it again.
The oil level should lie between the MAX
and MIN marks when the oil temperature is
about 68°F (+20°C). If the oil is colder, the
level will be lower, and at a higher tempera-
tures the level will be higher.
Top up with CHF 11S or CHF 202 power
steering fluid.
226 Car care
Battery If frequent short journeys are made, the

battery may need extra charging. This can
be done with a battery charger or by taking
WARNING the car for a long run.
If the battery is not being charged while the
• When working on the battery, highly engine is running, the following message
explosive gas can build up. A spark will appear on the SID:
could ignite this gas that collects Battery not charging.
around the battery. Make a safe stop.
Therefore, always avoid sparks and Contact Saab dealer.
open flames in the vicinity of the
battery. Check the drive belt (see page 229). If the
• The battery contains corrosive sulphu- belt is damaged, the engine may overheat,
ric acid. Always wear a face mask or Checking the battery electrolyte level. the battery may not be charged and the A/C
goggles when working on the battery. Level correct if level indicator dark. compressor may not work.
• If battery acid gets into the eyes or Battery should be changed if indicator is
splashes onto skin or clothing, wash light
the affected area liberally with water.
If acid gets into the eyes or a large
quantity makes contact with the skin, Check the charge state and electrolyte level
seek medical help. of the battery regularly.
• Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead NOTICE
compounds. Wash your hands after
handling A discharged battery can freeze and frac-
ture. Batteries should therefore always be
stored away from sub-zero temperatures.
Car care 227

Always connect the positive (red) cable to
the battery’s positive (+) terminal, and the
negative (black) cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery. Always disconnect
both battery leads when boost charging the
battery.
NOTICE
• If boost charging never use anything
but a 12-volt charger, see page 208.
• Do not connect the battery termi-
nals, + and –, incorrectly.
• Serious damage can occur to the car’s Turn the two retainers a quarter turn to Battery bracket
electrical system if a battery or alterna- unlock the battery cover.
tor lead is disconnected while the
engine is running.
• Exercise special care when removing
and fitting the positive (+) cable so as
not to damage the battery disconnect
switch.
A car with standard equipment specifica-

tions and a fully charged battery can be left
for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient
charge for starting. If extra equipment is fit-
ted, such as a mobile phone, the charge
may only be sufficient for about 15 days.
228 Car care

Battery disconnect switch 3
WARNING
If the battery disconnect switch has
tripped, do not reset it until you have visu-
ally inspected the car’s electrical system.
If there are visible signs of damage, have
the car checked at a workshop before
resetting the disconnect switch. We
recommend that you contact an author-
ised Saab workshop.
A collision could cause a short circuit in the Battery disconnect switch with reset
alternator or starter motor. A disconnect button
switch by the battery’s positive terminal cuts
off the battery from the alternator and starter
motor when the airbags and seatbelt pre-
tensioners are detonated.
NOTICE
Exercise special care when removing and
fitting the positive (+) cable so as not to
damage the battery disconnect switch.
Car care 229

Drive belt
WARNING
• Keep hands and clothing clear of drive
belts when engine is running.
• Always stop the engine before
inspecting the drive belt.
• The radiator fan is electric and can
start even when the engine is
switched off.
Drive belt
NOTICE
A slipping or broken poly-V-belt can
Serious damage can be done to the car’s result in:
electrical system if an alternator lead is
disconnected while the engine is running. • no charge to the battery
• no A/C compressor function.
The alternator is situated on the right-hand The belt tension is critical and is adjusted
side of the engine. It is driven by a automatically by the belt tensioner.
poly-V-belt from the crankshaft pulley.
230 Car care
Wipers and washers

Wiper blades
Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.
If poor wiper performance is experienced,
clean the windshield with washer fluid. This
is particularly important if the car has been
through an automatic car wash, as these
sometimes leave a wax coating on the wind-
shield.
If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,
fit new blades.
Change of wiper blades, windshield Change of wiper blades, rear window,
SportCombi
Windshield Rear window, SportCombi

1 Press in the catch (1). 1 Detach the blade from the arm by press-
2 Pull the complete wiper blade down- ing on the mounting for the blade from
wards so that it comes away from the below.
wiper arm. Slide the entire blade out 2 Fit the new blade by pressing the shaft
from the arm. of the blade into the arm's mounting.
The washer jet, which is located next to the
high-mounted brake light, is not adjustable.
Car care 231

Washers
WARNING
Take care not to spill washer fluid concen-
trate onto hot surfaces. Washer fluid
concentrate can contain flammable ingre-
dients such as alcohol.
The reservoir capacity is approx. 6 qts.

(5.8 litres).
1 quart (1 litre), the headlight washers (if Washer fluid reservoir
equipped) are deactivated. This is in order
to prioritize the windshield. The following Washer jets
message is displayed on the SID: The washer jets, which are adjustable, can
To prevent the smell of washer fluid from be cleaned with a pin if necessary.
Washer fluid level low. entering the car, recirculation can be acti-
Refill. vated automatically while the windshield is
washed. The recirculation symbol will
Headlight washers are only available on however not light up. This function is
certain markets. optional; contact a workshop. We recom-
mend that you contact a Saab dealer.
Fill with a mixture of washer fluid and water
as recommended by the table on
the packaging to reduce the risk of freezing
and to ensure effective cleaning (see also
page 106).
Car care 232

Changing bulbs If a stop light bulb fails
Sport Sedan: If a stop light bulb fails, the adjacent taillight will act
as a stop light to ensure traffic safety. Change the broken bulb when
possible.
WARNING
All rear light bulbs are of the same type and rated 21 W, with the
Before changing a bulb in the engine bay, switch off the engine exception of the license plate lighting which is rated 5 W.
to avoid the danger of fingers and hands being injured by moving
parts. Wrong bulb fitted
If a dipped or main beam bulb of too high a rating is fitted, a bulb
The radiator fan can cut in even when the engine is switched off. failure message will be shown on the SID (a too high wattage bulb
can damage the reflector).
If the following message is displayed but the bulb shines, it is most
NOTICE likely that an incorrect bulb has been fitted.
Switch off the ignition before changing a bulb, to avoid possible

short-circuiting. Right high beam failure.
Autochecking of lights Note:

The bulbs that are most important from the point of view of traffic
When changing bulbs, fit the same type of bulb (e.g. Long-Life)
safety are monitored by the car’s electrical system. If one of these
as that removed.
bulbs should fail, a message will be displayed on the SID.
Example of SID message: Headlight aiming, page 283.
Left low beam failure.
The following bulbs are not checked: parking lights, front fog lights,
reversing lights, license plate lighting, side marker lights and side
direction indicators.
SportCombi
The tail lights and brake lights consist of LEDs. If approx. 3/4 of the
LEDs on one side are broken then this is indicated in the SID.
233 Car care

Xenon headlight, dipped beam 3
WARNING
Xenon headlights are high tension. All work on xenon headlights,
including changing bulbs, must be carried out by dealer person-
nel.
Xenon headlights produce roughly two times as much light as halo-

gen bulbs and have a significantly longer service life.
The lamp units consist of a gas discharge lamp containing xenon.
When the lights are switched on a very high voltage activates the We recommend you to contact a Saab
xenon gas. The lamps soon reach full intensity. dealer to have a xenon headlight changed
Cars with xenon headlights have automatic levelling. The levelling
system is comprised of two sensors, one on the front suspension
and one on the rear suspension, and a control unit by the engine bay
fuse box. Headlight alignment is adjusted automatically to the car’s
load to prevent dazzling drivers in oncoming traffic.
If a fault is detected in the system, the following message will be dis-
played on the SID:
Headlight levelling
malfunction.
Car care 234
Retainers on the battery cover Changing the low beam bulb
Low beam, halogen 4 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.
Left-hand side Left-hand side
1 Lift aside the hose running along the side of the battery cover. 5 Refit the air pipe to the front of the battery box.
2 Release the two retainers (a quarter of a turn counterclockwise) 6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
in the leading edge of the cover and remove the cover. 7 Refit the battery cover.
3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge of the battery box. NOTICE
5 Pull up the fuse panel in front of the battery (certain variants),
see page 253. Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could
damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is
Both sides not designed to cope with higher wattages.
1 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.
2 Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise and withdraw the holder
from the reflector.
3 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.
Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until
it locks.
235 Car care
Retainers on the battery cover Changing the high beam bulb
High beam, halogen 4 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.
Left-hand side Left-hand side
1 Lift aside the hose running along the side of the battery cover. 5 Refit the air pipe to the front of the battery box.
2 Release the two retainers (a quarter of a turn counterclockwise) 6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
in the leading edge of the cover and remove the cover. 7 Refit the battery cover.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge of the battery box. NOTICE
5 Pull up the fuse panel in front of the battery (certain variants),
see page 253. Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could
damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is
Both sides not designed to cope with higher wattages.
1 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.
2 Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise and withdraw the holder
from the reflector.
3 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.
Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until
it locks.
236 Car care

Both sides:
1 Remove the cover from the rear of the
headlight.
2 Withdraw the bulb holder from the lamp
unit.
3 Fit the new bulb.
4 Refit the cover over the rear of the head-
light.
Left-hand side:
5 Refit the air pipe to the front edge of the
battery box.
6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
7 Refit the battery cover and hose.
Parking lights Front turn signal bulbs
The parking light bulb is located in the same Left-hand side:
reflector as the main beam bulb. 1 Lift aside the hose running along the
side of the battery cover.
Left-hand side:
2 Release the two retainers on the battery
1 Lift aside the hose running along the cover and remove the cover.
side of the battery cover. 3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
2 Release the two retainers on the battery 4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge
cover and remove the cover. of the battery box.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge
of the battery box.
Car care 237

Both sides: Side-mounted turn signal bulbs
1 The bulb holder has a bayonet fitting. 1 Slide the lamp fitting forward so that its
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise rear end can be pulled out.
and withdraw it. 2 Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
2 The bulb also has a bayonet fitting. and withdraw it from the lamp fitting.
Press in the bulb and twist it counter- Change the bulb.
clockwise. 3 To fit, engage the two catches on the
3 Fit the new bulb. rear edge of the lamp fitting with the
4 To facilitate fitting, look in through the edge of the opening. Then press in the
headlight lens when fitting the bulb. front edge of the lamp fitting so that the
Check that the new bulb is firmly seated. groove in the spring engages the plastic
edge.
Left-hand side:
5 Refit the air pipe to the front edge of the
battery box.
6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
7 Refit the battery cover and hose.
238 Car care

1 Undo one screw in the wheel housing.
Lower the air shield.
2 Remove the protective cover. Release
the two spring clips securing the bulb.
3 Unplug the connector.
4 Change the bulb. Try not to touch the
glass part of the bulb with your fingers.
The height of the beam can be adjusted
using a screwdriver inserted through the
hole in the lower grille adjacent to the lens.
Front fog lights 3 Side marker lights

1 Slide the lens rearward so that its front
WARNING part can be pulled out.
2 Fit the new bulb.
• Never crawl under a car that is 3 When refitting, make sure that the
supported only by a jack. Always use groove in the spring engages the plastic
axle stands. edge of the bumper trim.
• Refer to the information on jacks on
pages 273 and 274.
Car care 239
Taillights, Sport Sedan Taillights, Convertible Taillights, SportCombi

1 Turn signals 1 Turn signals 1 Turn signals
2 Taillights/stop lights 2 Taillights/stop lights 2 Taillights/stop lights
3 Reversing lights 3 Reversing lights 3 Reversing lights
4 Rear fog light (left-hand side) 4 Rear fog light (left-hand side) 4 Rear fog light (left-hand side)
5 High-mounted stop light 5 High-mounted stop light 5 High-mounted stop light
Sport Sedan: If a stop light bulb fails, the

adjacent taillight will act as a stop light to
ensure traffic safety. Change the broken
bulb when possible.
240 Car care
Stop lights, taillights and turn Stop lights, taillights and turn Turn signals, reversing light and
signal bulbs, Sport Sedan signal bulbs, Convertible rear fog light, SportCombi
1 Lower the cover in the trim behind the 1 Remove the cover. 1 Remove the cover.
lights. 2 Carefully remove the bulb holder with 2 Remove the bulb holder with the broken
Right-hand side: Unlock the plastic rivet the broken bulb.The bulb holder has a bulb. The bulb holder has a bayonet
by depressing the centre no more than bayonet fitting. fitting.
3 mm. Take hold of the collar of the rivet 3 Change the bulb. 3 Fit the new bulb.
and pull it out. Refer also to page 241.
4 Refit the bulb holder and cover. 4 Refit the bulb holder and the cover.
2 Lift the plastic lug on the lamp housing
that secures the bulb holder.
3 Carefully remove the entire bulb holder
unit from the lamp housing. Change the
bulb.
4 Refit the bulb holder. Press the bulb
holder home so that the plastic lug
snaps into place.
Car care 241
Changing bulbs
Reversing lights and rear fog 1 Press down the plastic lug on the bulb Reversing lights and rear fog
light, Sport Sedan holder. lights, Convertible
Removing the trunk lid trim 2 Carefully remove the entire bulb holder Removing the trunk lid trim
1 Remove the two screws securing the unit from the lamp housing. Change the 1 Remove the two screws securing the
grab handle to the inside of the trunk lid. bulb. grab handle to the inside of the trunklid.
2 Unlock the plastic rivets by pressing in 3 Refit the bulb holder. Press the lug so 2 Unlock the plastic rivets by pressing in
the center of each rivet. Pull out the that it snaps into place. the centre of each rivet no more than
rivets by taking hold of the rivet’s collar. To refit the trunk lid trim 3 mm. Pull out the rivets by taking hold
You can use the button on the handle of the 1 Withdraw the center of the rivets. of the rivet’s collar.
screwdriver supplied with the car to unlock 2 Fit the trim in place on the trunk lid. You can use the button on the handle of the
the rivets. screwdriver supplied with the car to unlock
3 Fit the rivets. Lock the rivets in place by the rivets.
pressing the center buttons in until flush
with the collar.
242 Car care
Changing bulbs
1 Carefully remove the bulb holder with Dome light, front, Sport Sedan Dome light, rear, Sport Sedan
the broken bulb. The bulb holder has a and SportCombi and SportCombi
bayonet fitting. 1 Pull down the rear edge of the lens. 1 Remove the entire overhead panel:
2 Fit the new bulb. 2 Fit the new bulb. ease out the trailing end first, and then
3 Refit the bulb holder. 3 Insert the guide lugs on the front edge of both sides of the front edge.
To refit the trunk lid trim the lens and press the lens home. 2 Fit the new bulb.
1 Withdraw the centre of the rivets.
2 Fit the trim in place on the trunk lid.
3 Fit the rivets. Lock the rivets in place by
pressing the center buttons in until flush
with the collar.
Car care 243
Hatch opened for replacement of centre Reverse side of the light fitting. The
Dome light, Convertible bulb arrows mark the outer bulbs
1 Pull down the rear edge of the light
fitting.
2 If the center bulb needs replacing, open
the hatch over the bulbs. Pull the bulb
out of the bulb holder.
If one of the outer bulbs needs replacing,
turn the light fitting round. Change the
bulb from the reverse of the lighting
fitting. The bulb has a bayonet fitting.
3 Position the front edge of the light fitting
and press the fitting up towards the
windscreen rail.
244 Car care
License plate lighting Glove box lighting 3 Trunk lighting, Sport Sedan
1 Undo the two screws and remove the 1 Remove the lamp housing using a short The lamp fitting is located under the parcel
lens. screwdriver. shelf.
2 Fit the new bulb. 2 Fit the new bulb. 1 Remove the lamp fitting by pulling down
3 Make sure the seal on the lens is 3 Insert the connector side first when refit- one end.
correctly seated. ting the lamp. 2 Fit the new bulb.
4 Refit the lens and tighten the two 3 Insert the connector side first when refit-
screws. ting the lamp.
Car care 245
Trunk lighting, Convertible Trunk lighting, SportCombi Courtesy/floor lighting 3

1 Remove the lamp in the rear end first. 1 Pull the lamp housing forward and lift it 1 Release one edge of the lamp fitting
2 Change the bulb. out at the front. using a screwdriver.
3 Insert the connector side first when refit- 2 Fit the new bulb. The bulb is secured in 2 Fit the new bulb.
ting the lamp. the holder. 3 Insert the connector side first when refit-
3 Start by inserting in the front edge of the ting the lamp.
lamp housing and then pressing in the
rear edge. Other bulbs
If any other bulbs need changing, we rec-
ommend that you visit a Saab dealer.
246 Car care

Bulb table
No. Designation Watt-

age
1 H7 55 Headlight
2 H3 55 Front fog lights 3
3 P21W 21 Taillights; rear fog light; brake lights;
reversing lights
4 PY21W 21 Direction indicator, front/rear
5 R10W 10 Rear dome lighting; courtesy
lighting 3; glove box lighting; trunk
lighting, Convertible
6 R5W 5 License plate lighting; trunk lighting,
Sport Sedan
7 T4W 4 Reading light, rear
8 WY5W/W5W 5 Side-mounted turn signal (yellow);
parking lights; front dome lighting
NOTICE
Only fit lamps of the specified rating. Lamps of the wrong wattage
could damage the wiring harness and electronics.
Car care 247

Fuses The fuses are housed in three fuse panels:
one behind a hatch on the left-hand end of
the dash, one in the engine bay (additional
WARNING small unit in front of battery) and one on the
left-hand side of the trunk. There is space
To avoid the risk of short-circuiting and/or for spare fuses in the hatch on the left-hand
fire breaking out in the electrical system, end of the dash.
the following should be heeded:
• We recommend that you allways
consult an Saab dealer before modify- Sound fuse / Blown fuse
ing or adding any electrical equip-
ment. Failure to do so can result in the
electrical system being damaged. To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it
from the panel. If the filament is broken, the
• Never replace a fuse with one having fuse has blown.
a higher rating than specified (see
page 249). The color of the fuse indi-
cates its amperage.
• If the same fuse blows repeatedly,
have the electrical system checked by
a workshop. We recommend that you
contact a Saab dealer.
• If a MAXI fuse blows, it means that
there is a major fault in the electrical
system. Have the car checked without
delay. We recommend that you
248 Car care

Some fuses and relays may be fitted but not MAXI fuses
connected to the car’s electrical system. The car also has a number of large fuses
known as MAXI fuses. These are designed
to protect the car’s electrical system from
being damaged. Each MAXI fuse protects a
number of electrical circuits and functions
and therefore has a higher rating (amper-
age) than the standard fuses. No spare
MAXI fuses are supplied with the car.
NOTICE
If a MAXI fuse blows, there is a major fault
Fuse panel in end of dash in the electrical system. Have the car
checked. We recommend that you
A special tool for removing fuses is provided
on the hatch on the left-hand end of the
dash. Simply push the tool onto the fuse,
squeeze and remove the fuse.
Car care 249

12 15 Interior lighting incl. glove box
13 10 Accessories
20 Radio, sound system I 3; control panel,
14 Infotainment System 3
15 30 Control module in driver’s door
16 5 Passenger Sensing System
17 - -
18 7.5 Manual climate control 3
19 - -
20 7.5 Headlight levelling switch 3
7.5 Hands-free 3; brake light switch; manual climate
21 control 3; clutch pedal switch
Fuse panel in end of fascia
22 30 Cigarette lighter 3
No. Amp. Function 23 40 Cabin fan
1 15 Steering wheel lock 24 7.5 Airbag control module
2 5 Steering column unit; ignition switch 25 - -
10 Hands-free 3; CD-player 3/CD-changer in cabin 3; 26 5 Yaw sensor (cars with ESP)
3 SID
27 - -
10 Main instrument unit; manual climate control;
4 automatic climate control (ACC) 3
7.5 Control module in front doors; Park Brake Shift Lock
5 (automatic transmission)
6 7.5 Brake light switch
7 20 Dash fuse panel; fuel filler door
8 30 Control module in passenger front door
9 10 Dash fuse panel
30 Trailer socket 3; electrical socket in storage com-
10 partment between seats 3
11 10 Data link connection (diagnostics)
250 Car care

Trunk fuse panel, left-hand side
No. Amp. Function
1–5 MAXI -
6 30 Control module in left rear door
7 30 Control module in right rear door
8 20 Trailer 3
9 - -
30 Left-hand brake light; rear right turn signal; right tail-
light; right reversing light; high-mounted brake light;
10 trailer lights
11 - -
12 - -
13 - -
14 - -
15 15 Seat heating, left seat 3
Trunk fuse panel, Sport Sedan 16 15 Seat heating, right seat 3
17 7.5 Autodimming rearview mirror 3; rain sensor 3
18 15 Sunroof 3
19 7.5 Telematics (OnStar) 3
20 7.5 DVD player (navigation system) 3
7.5 Saab Parking Assistance (SPA) 3; control module in
21 rear doors
22 30 Amplifier, sound system III 3
23 - -
24 10 Movement sensor 3; CD changer in trunk 3
25 30 Electrically adjustable driver’s seat with memory 3
Car care 251

30 Right-hand stop light; rear left turn signal; left taillight;
rear fog light; left reversing light; license plate light-
26 ing; trunk lighting; trailer lights
10 Convertible: Lumbar support, electrically adjustable
27 front seat 3
28 15 Telematics
29 - -
Trunk fuse panel, Convertible

252 Car care

13 - -
14 - -
15 30 Washer fluid pump, headlights 3
30 Front right parking light; front right turn signal; left and
right side turn signal; right high beam; left low beam;
16 front left fog light 3
17 30 Windshield wiper motor, low speed
18 30 Windshield wiper motor, high speed
19 20 Parking heater; auxiliary heater 3
20 10 Headlight levelling 3
21 - -
22 30 Washer fluid pump, windshield
Fuse panel in engine bay
23 - -
No. Amp. Function 24 20 Flash-to-pass
1 - - 25 20 Amplifier, sound system II 3
10 Engine control module; automatic transmission con- 30 Front left turn signal; front left parking light; front right
2 trol module 3 26 fog light 3; right low beam; left high beam
3 20 Horn 27 MAXI
4 10 Engine control module; battery disconnect switch 3 –37
5 - -
10 Selector lever, automatic transmission 3; clutch pedal
6 switch
7 - -
8 5 Relay for vacuumpump (brake system) 3
9 - -
10 - -
11 - -
12 10 Washer fluid pump, rear window 3
Car care 253
Relays
R 1 Washer fluid pump, windshield
R 2 -
R 3 -
R 4 -
R 5 Flash-to-pass
R 6 Horn
R 7 -
R 8 Starter motor
R 9 Windshield wipers ON/OFF
R10 Washer fluid pump, rear window 3
R11 Ignition +15 Fuse panel in front of battery 3
R12 Windshield wipers, high/low speed No. Amp. Function
R13 - 1 - Air pump, secondary air 3
R14 Washer fluid pump, headlights 3 20 Fuel pump; preheated oxygen sensors (lambda
R15 - 2 probe)
R16 - 3 10 A/C compressor
4 30 Main relay
Relays
1 -
2 A/C-compressor
3 Preheated oxygen sensors (lambda probe)
4 Main relay, engine (ECM/EVAP/injectors)
254 Car care
Automatic tire pressure Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
monitoring 3 NOTICE inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
Great care must be taken when changing mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
tires so as not to damage the sensors that vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
WARNING are integrated in the valves. label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
The system is intended to aid the driver. • Remove the rear side first. placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
The driver is always ultimately responsi- should consult the appropriate section of
ble for ensuring that the tire pressure is • Start removing the tire at a point oppo- this owner’s manual to determine the proper
correct. site the valve. tire inflation pressure, see page 306.) When
the low tire pressure telltale is illuminated,
For optimum safety, economy and • Do not allow the tire removal equip- one or more of your tires is significantly
comfort, check the tires regularly, even if ment to come closer than approx. underinflated.
the automatic tire pressure monitoring 10 cm to the valve.
system has not issued an alarm You should stop and check your tires as
• Start and finish fitting approx. 4 in. soon as possible, and inflate them to the
The pressure monitoring system consists of (10 cm) from the valve. proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
a sensor in each wheel, a detector in three under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
wheel housings and a receiver. The sensors • Do not inflate the tire to above heat and can lead to tire failure.
are located inside the wheels directly adja- 700 kPa/100 psi.
cent to the air valves.
Car care 255

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
cle’s handling and stopping ability.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction telltale to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. When
the malfunction telltale is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-
functions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of incompatible
replacement tires on the vehicle. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement tires are Valve with sensor Valve without sensor
compatible with the TPMS.
Tire pressure information is sent wirelessly
to the receiver. If the tire pressure drops If the vehicle is equipped with a different
If the tire pressure drops 25% or more below wheel size than those fitted as standard and
The system checks the tire pressure when therefore should use a different recom-
the car is travelling over 18 mph (30 km/h). highest recommended pressure (see tire
pressure label on page 267), the SID will mended highest tire pressure the owner
The system is “self-learning”, which means issue a warning as to which tire is affected. shall contact a workshop to have the system
that the position of the wheels can be recalibrated. We recommend that you
changed without requiring adjustments to Low tire pressure, contact a Saab dealer.
the monitoring system. The spare wheel front left.
does not have a sensor. Make a safe stop.
The sensor batteries have an average life of Adjust the tire pressure as soon as possible.
10 years. The batteries cannot be changed
but require the sensor units to be replaced.
The system does not warn if a tire is overin-
flated.
256 Car care

If the tire pressure continues to drop, the
SID will issue a warning alarm when the
Malfunction Tires
pressure is an additional 0.2 bar below the Tire pressure Your new vehicle comes with high-quality
first warning level. system failure. tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If
Contact Saab dealer. you ever have questions about your tire
Low tire pressure. warranty and where to obtain service, see
The message shown above will be dis-
front left. your Saab Warranty and Service Record
played on the SID if:
Check tires. Booklet for details.
Reduce speed (avoid heavy braking and • a wheel without pressure sensor is fitted
violent steering wheel movements) and (e.g. spare wheel)
stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so. • one, two or three pressure sensors are WARNING
Change the wheel. broken or missing
Poor maintained and improperly used
• two or more detectors are missing or tires are dangerous.
broken
• the receiver malfunctions • Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
• a fault arises in the system. friction. You could have an blow-out
The message shown above is not displayed and a serious accident. See “Loading
if none of the wheels have sensors, such as Your Vehicle” on page 267.
if winter wheels without sensors are fitted.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact – such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recom-
mended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Car care 257

Inflation - Tire Pressure Adjust the tire pressure to match the current High speed operation
The Tire-Loading Information label shows load and speed of the car (see page 306).
the correct inflation pressures for your tires The stated tire pressures apply to cold tires,
when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehi- i.e. tires that are the same temperature as WARNING
cle has been sitting for at least three hours the outside air temperature. Tire pressure
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). increases as the tires become warm (e.g. Driving at high speeds, 100 mph
during highway driving) by approximately (160 km/h) or higher, puts an additional
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that 4 psi (28 kPa). When the temperature of the strain on tires.
underinflation or overinflation is all tires changes by 50°F (10°C), the tire pres-
right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have Sustained high-speed driving causes
sure will change 2 psi (14 kPa). excessive heat build up and can cause
enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following: Never reduce the pressure of a hot tire. If the sudden tire failure. You could have a
tires are hot when you check them, only crash and you or others could be killed.
• Too much flexing increase the pressure, if necessary. Some high-speed rated tires require infla-
• Too much heat tion pressure adjustment for high speed
• Tire overloading operation. When speed limits and road
• Bad wear conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
• Bad handling are rated for high speed operation, in
• Bad fuel economy excellent condition, and set to the correct
If your tires have too much air (overinfla- cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle
tion), you can get the following: load.
• Unusual wear
• Bad handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
258 Car care

If you’ll be driving at high speeds, speeds of When to check After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is Check your tires once a month or more. front and rear inflation pressures as shown
legal, set the cold inflation pressure to the on the Tire-Loading Information label. Make
maximum inflation pressure shown on the Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It certain that all wheel nuts are properly tight-
tire sidewall, or to 35 psi (244 kPa), which- should be at 60 psi (420 kPa). ened. See page 274.
ever is lower. See the example below.
When you end this high-speed driving, How to Check
return to the cold inflation pressure shown Use a good quality pocket-type gage to WARNING
on the Tire and Loading Information label. check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 267. tires are properly inflated simply by looking Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
at them. Radial tires may look properly which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
Example: inflated even when they’re underinflated. become loose after a time. The wheel
You’ll find maximum load and inflation pres- Be sure to put the valve caps back on the could come off and cause an accident.
sure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small valve stems. They help prevent leaks by When you change a wheel, remove any
letters near the rim flange. It will read some- keeping out dirt and moisture. rust or dirt from places where the wheel
thing like this: Maximum load 690 kg attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
Tire Inspection and Rotation you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do
(1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press
Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
For this example, you would set the inflation brush later, if you need to, to get all the
pressure for high-speed driving at 35 psi (12 500 km).
rust or dirt off. See “Changing a tire” on
(244 kPa). Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate page 273.
your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged
tires or wheels. See “When It Is Time for
New Tires” on page 259 and “Wheel
Replacement” on page 262 for more infor-
mation.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve
more uniform wear for all tires on the vehi-
cle. The first rotation is the most important.
When rotating your tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern. Left front tire to left
rear. Left rear tire to right front. Right front to
right rear. Right rear to left front.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your
tire rotation.
Car care 259

Flat spotting When It Is Time for New Tires
All tires get hot, especially on long journeys One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is
or when the car is driven hard. After the car to check the treadwear indicators, which will
has been parked with hot tires and the tires appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch
have cooled down, a flat spot can form in the (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.
tire, where it is in contact with the ground. You need a new tire if any of the following
The same can occur if the car has not been statements are true:
moved for a long time.
Flat spots can cause vibration that can be • You can see the indicators at three or
felt through the steering wheel, similar to more places around the tire.
that experienced when the wheels need bal- • You can see cord or fabric showing
ancing. through the tire’s rubber.
Flat spots of this type disappear once the • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or
tires get hot again, usually after 10–15 miles snagged deep enough to show cord or Treadwear indicator
(20–25 km) of driving at cruising speed. If fabric.
the outdoor temperature is low it takes a • The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
longer distance. • The tire has a puncture, cut or other
damage that can’t be repaired well
Treadwear indicators
because of the size or location of the The tires incorporate wear indicators in the
damage. form of smooth, treadless strips across the
width, which become visible when only
2/32" (1.6 mm) of tread remains. As soon as
the indicators become visible, new tires
should be fitted without delay.
Make sure you are familiar with the legal
limit for minimum tread depth in your
country and also any regulations gov-
erning the use of winter (snow) tires.
260 Car care

Buying New Tires The wheels and tires have been carefully
To find out what kind and size of tires you matched to the characteristics of the car and NOTICE
need, look at the Tire-Loading Information play a key role in its outstanding roadhold-
ing and handling. Always consult your Saab dealer before
label. changing the car’s wheels or tires on your
If you wish to fit other tires or wheels than Do not take it for granted that a wheel/tire
Saab.
those supplied with the car, consult your combination will work in the best possible
Saab dealer first as to the possibilities way, just because it can be fitted to the car. Wide wheels and tires with side walls that
available. To ensure that the speedometer is as accu- are too low can:
Wheels/tires combinations that are not rate as possible it should be reprogrammed • be damaged in potholes, etc.
approved by Saab can negatively affect the if wheels of a different dimension are fitted.
car’s directional stability, steering and brak- Contact a Saab dealer. • cause springs, shock absorbers and
ing in both wet and dry conditions. Because of front wheel drive, the front tires wheel bearings and body mountings
tend to wear faster than the rear ones. New to be overloaded.
tires should always be fitted in pairs, so that
• affect the function of the Electronic
tires on the same axle have the same
Stability Program (ESP).
amount of tread.
Store wheels lying flat or hanging – never The speed and load limits of the tires
standing upright. must not be exceeded; see page 266.
Wheels larger than 17" must not be fitted
on the Saab 9-3 for reasons above. The
permissible offset is 1.61 inch (41 mm).
Car care 261

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applica- The treadwear grade is a comparative
WARNING rating based on the wear rate of the tire
ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoul-
der and maximum section width. For exam- when tested under controlled conditions on
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
ple: a specified government test course. For
control while driving. If you mix tires of example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
different sizes or types (radial and bias- and a half (1.5) times as well on the govern-
belted tires), the vehicle may not handle Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature
A ment course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
properly, and you could have a crash. tive performance of tires depends upon the
Using tires of different sizes may also The following information relates to the
system developed by the United States actual conditions of their use, however, and
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
National Highway Traffic Safety Administra- may depart significantly from the norm due
use the same size and type tires on all to variations in driving habits, service prac-
wheels. It’s all right to drive with your tion, which grades tires by treadwear, trac-
tion and temperature performance. (This tices and differences in road characteristics
compact spare temporarily, it was devel- and climate.
oped for use on your vehicle. See applies only to vehicles sold in the United
“Compact spare” on page 270. States.) The grades are molded on the side-
walls of most passenger car tires. The Uni- Traction – AA, A, B, C
form Tire Quality Grading system does not The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-
WARNING space-saver or temporary use spare tires, sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 ment as measured under controlled condi-
inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-pro- tions on specified government test surfaces
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
duction tires. of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
the wheel rim flanges could develop
While the tires available on General Motors may have poor traction performance. Warn-
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
passenger cars and light trucks may vary ing: The traction grade assigned to this tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
with respect to these grades, they must also is based on straight-ahead braking traction
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
conform to federal safety requirements and tests, and does not include acceleration,
wheels on your vehicle.
additional General Motors Tire Perfor- cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
mance Criteria (TPC) standards. characteristics.
262 Car care

Temperature – A, B, C Wheel Alignment and Tire Wheel Replacement
The temperature grades are A (the highest), Balance Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep
to the generation of heat and its ability to dis- and balanced carefully at the factory to give coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and
sipate heat when tested under controlled you the longest tire life and best overall per- wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory formance. leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
cause the material of the tire to degenerate Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel bal-
ancing are not needed. However, if you See your dealer if any of these conditions
and reduce tire life, and excessive temper- exist.
ature can lead to sudden tire failure. The notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pull-
ing one way or the other, the alignment may Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you
grade C corresponds to a level of perfor- need.
need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
mance which all passenger car tires must
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, Each new wheel should have the same
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A your wheels may need to be rebalanced. load-carrying capacity, diameter, width,
represent higher levels of performance on offset and be mounted the same way as the
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum one it replaces.
required by law. If you need to replace any of your wheels,
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only
is established for a tire that is properly with new Saab original equipment parts.
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive This way, you will be sure to have the right
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your
either separately or in combination, can vehicle.
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
WARNING
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts
and wheel nuts for replacement.
Car care 263

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains
problems with bearing life, brake cool-
ing, speedometer or odometer calibra-
tion, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehi- WARNING WARNING
cle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis. Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is If your vehicle has 235/45 R17 size tires,
See “Changing a tire” on page 273. dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been don’t use tire chains, there’s not enough
used or how far it’s been driven. It could clearance.
fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you
have to replace a wheel, use a new GM Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
WARNING proper amount of clearance can cause
original equipment wheel.
damage to the brakes, suspension or
When fitting just one new pair of tires,
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by
these should be fitted to the rear wheels,
the tire chains could cause you to lose
as these are more critical to the direc- control of your vehicle and you or others
tional stability of the car (e.g. on braking may be injured in a crash.
or in a skid). The existing rear wheels
should therefore be moved to the front. Use another type of traction device only if
its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that manu-
facturer’s instructions. To help avoid
damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it’s
contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin
your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
264 Car care

Notice: If your vehicle does not have If a Tire Goes Flat Tire Sidewall Labeling
235/45R17 size tires, use tire chains only It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while Useful information about a tire is molded
where legal and only when you must. you’re driving, especially if you maintain into it´s sidewall.
Contact your Saab dealer regarding suit- your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire,
able snow chains. Install them on the Tire size: The tire size ia a combination of
it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But letters and numbers used to define a partic-
front tires and tighten them as tightly as if you should ever have a “blowout”, here are
possible with the ends securely ular tire´s width, height, aspect ratio, con-
a few tips about what to expect and what to struction type and service description.
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the do:
chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you Department of Transportation (DOT):
can hear the chains contacting your If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a The Department of Transportation (DOT)
vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. code indicates that the tire is in compliance
contact continues, slow down until it Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and with the U.S. Department of Transportation
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to main- Motor Vehicle Safety standards.
wheels with chains on will damage your tain lane position, and then gently brake to Tire Identification Number (TIN): The let-
vehicle. a stop well out of the traffic lane. ters and numbers following DOT code are
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
much like a skid and may require the same TIN shows the manufacturer and plant
correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear code, tire size, and date the tire was manu-
blowout, remove your foot from the acceler- factured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
ator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by of the tire.
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can number of plies in the sidewall and under
still steer. Gently brake to a stop – well off the tread.
the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to
use your jacking equipment to change a flat
tire safely.
Car care 265

Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire Size Aspect ratio: A two-digit number that indi-
Tire manufacturers are required to grade The following illustration shows an example cates the tire height-to-width measure-
tires based on the performance factors: of a typical passenger car tire size. ments. For example, if the tire size aspect
treadwear, traction and temperature resis- ratio is “55”, as shown in item “C” of the illus-
tance. For more information see “Uniform tration, it would mean that the tire´s sidewall
Tire Quality Grading” on page 261. 215 / 55 R 16 93 H is 55% as high as it is wide.
Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Max- Belt Rating: A letter code is used to indicate
imum load that can be carried and the max- | | | | | | the type of ply construction in the tire. The
imum pressure needed to support that load. a b c d e f letter “R” means radial ply construction; the
For information on recommended tire pres- letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply con-
sure see “Recommended lowest tire pres- a Tire Width struction; and the letter “B” means belted-
sure, cold tires” on page 306 and “Loading b Aspect Ratio bias ply construction.
Your Vehicle” on page 267. c Belt Rating Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
d Rim diameter inches.
e Load range Load range: The load range represents the
f Speed rating load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry.
Speed Rating: The maximum speed that a
tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings
Tire Width: The three-digit number indi- range from “A” to “Z”.
cates the tire section width in millimeters
from sidewall to sidewall.
266 Car care

Tire markings Speed ratings
An example of the meaning of the different Tire approved for speeds up to
markings in a tire size is given below for a Q 100 mph (160 km/h)
tire size of 225/45 R17 94H:
S Max. 112 mph (180 km/h)
225 Tire section width, mm T Max. 118 mph (190 km/h)
Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height H Max. 130 mph (210 km/h)
as a percentage of the section
45 width V Max. 149 mph (240 km/h) TIN-code
W Max. 168 mph (270 km/h) a Manufacturer´s Identification Mark
R Radial ply
Y Max. 186 mph (300 km/h) b Tire Size
Wheel rim diameter 17 in at bead
17 seats c Tire Type Code
d Date of Manufacture
94 Tire load index
H Speed rating
Tire load indices

Tire approved for max. 1355 lbs.
91 (615 kg)
93 Max. 1433 lbs. (650 kg)
94 Max. 1477 lbs. (670 kg)
95 Max. 1521 lbs. (690 kg)
97 Max. 1609 lbs. (730 kg)
Car care 267

Loading Your Vehicle Tire Terminology and Definitions DOT Markings: A code molded into the
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in
tire pressing outward on each square inch of compliance with the U.S. Department of
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds Transportation motor vehicle safety stan-
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). dards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanu-
Accessory Weight: This means the com- meric designator which can also identify the
bined weight of optional accessories, for tire manufacturer, production plant, brand
example, automatic transmission, power and date of production.
steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and air conditioning. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see
“Loading Your Vehicle” on page 267.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire´s
This label can only be found on vehicles GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
sold in the U.S. height to its width.
the front axle, see “Loading Your Vehicle”
Vehicles sold in Canada have the tire Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is on page 295.
information label in the glove box, see located between the plies and the tread.
Cords may be made from steel or other rein- GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
page 307. the rear axle, see “Loading Your Vehicle” on
forcing materials.
page 267.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
This is an example of what your vehicle´s ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
Tire-Loading Information/Certification label alternate angles substantially less than 90 an asymmetrical tire that must always face
might look like. It is located on the B-pillar degrees to the centerline of the tread. outward when mounted on a vehicle.
and shows how much weight your vehicle Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air
may properly carry. The label tells you the pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to one psi.
pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per
proper size, and recommended inflation Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa), before
pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It on light duty trucks and some multipurpose
also gives you important information about a tire has built up heat from driving. See
“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 257. passenger vehicles.
the number of people that can be in your
vehicle and the total weight that you can Curb weight: This means the weight of a Load Index: An assigned number ranging
carry. This weight is called the Vehicle motor vehicle with standard and optional from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
Capacity Weight, and includes the weight of equipment including the maximum capacity carrying capacity of a tire.
all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory- of fuel, oil and coolant, without passengers
installed options. and cargo.
268 Car care

Maximum Load rating: The load rating for Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehi- Tread Width: The width of the tire´s tread.
a tire at the maximum permissible inflation cle manufacturer´s recommended tire infla- UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grade Stan-
pressure for that tire. tion pressure shown on the tire placard, see dards, a tire information system that pro-
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The “Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 257 and vides consumers with ratings for a tire´s
sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehi- “Loading Your Vehicle” on page 267. traction, temperature and treadwear. Rat-
cle capacity weight; and production options Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which ings are determined by tire manufacturers
weight. the ply cords that extend to the beads are using government testing procedures. The
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pres- laid at substantially 90 degrees to the cen- rating are molded into the sidewall of the
sure: The maximum cold inflation pressure terline of the tread. tire. See “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” on
to which a tire may be inflated. Rim: A metal support for a tire or a tire and page 261.
Normal occupant weight: The number of tube assembly upon which the tire beads Vehicle Capacity Weight: Is the number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat mul- are seated. designated seating positions multipled by
tipled by 150 pounds (68 kg). See “Loading Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the 150 pounds (68 kg) plus the rated cargo
Your Vehicle” on page 267. tread and the bead. load. See “Loading Your Vehicle” on
Occupant Distribution: Designated seat- Speed rating: An alphanumeric code page 267.
ing positions. assigned to a tire indicating the maximum Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a speed at which a tire can operate. on an individual tire due to curb weight,
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side Traction: The friction between the tire and accessory weight, occupant weight and
that faces outward when mounted on a vehi- the road surface. The amount of grip pro- cargo weight.
cle. The side of the tire that contains a white- vided. Vehicle Placard: A label permanently
wall bears white lettering or bears manufac- Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, attached to a vehicle showing original
turer, brand and or model name molding on sometimes called “wear bars”, that show equipment tire size and the recommended
the other sidewall of the tire. across the tread of a tire when only cold inflation pressure. See “Loading Your
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on 2/32 inch of tread remains. See “When It Is Vehicle” on page 267.
passenger cars and some light duty trucks Time for New Tires” on page 259.
and multipurpose vehicles.
Car care 269

Steps for Determining Correct 5 Determine the combined weight of Winter tires
Load Limit luggage and cargo being loaded on Winter (snow) tires are recommended for
the vehicle. That weight may not winter climates where the majority of your
1 Locate the statement “The safely exceed the available cargo driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter
combined weight of occupants and and luggage load capacity calcu- tires should be fitted to all four wheels to
cargo should never exceed lated in Step 4. maintain a proper balance. Your Saab
XXX pounds” on your vehicle´s dealer can advise you of to the correct size
placard. 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans- tire for your car (if different from the original
2 Determine the combined weight of ferred to your vehicle. Consult this size) and also supply Saab approved winter
the driver and passengers that will manual to determine how this tires pre-mounted on steel or alloy rims.
be riding in your vehicle. reduces the available cargo and Winter tires normally use a different speed
3 Substract the combined weight of luggage load capacity of your vehi- rating compared to summer/all season tires.
the driver and passengers from cle. Make sure not to exceed the stated speed
XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. rating on the tires you use.
4 The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5x150) =
650 lbs.).
270 Car care
Compact spare The spare tire, the tools and the jack with its
crank are carried under a panel in the trunk.
Fold the carpeting forward to ease access to
WARNING the tools and spare tire.
The screwdriver handle has a “button” for
The spare tire or punctured tire must be removing plastic rivets. This type of rivet
stowed under the trunk floor, and secured must be removed when changing the light
in place with the retaining nut. bulb in the trunk lid (see page 241).
Your Saab is equipped with a trip computer
The compact spare is light and easy to and you can use its “Speed warning” func-
handle when changing the tire. Its use is tion, to monitor driving speed since you
only permitted when a standard tire has sus- must not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h), see
tained a puncture. The maximum life of the page 94.
Date code tire is only just over 2,000 miles (3,500 km).
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the
compact spare fitted.
Tire date code The tire pressure should be 60 psi
(420 kPa). Put the punctured tire in the
Tires should be regarded as perishable
goods. As the tires age, the rubber becomes spare wheel well under the trunk floor.
progressively harder, and the roadholding “Driving with the compact spare tire”, see
ability of the tires diminishes. This is partic- page 208.
ularly true on winter tires. Have the standard tire repaired and refitted
Tires have a code that specifies their date of as soon as possible.
manufacture. The first two digits denote the
week number and the last two digits the
year.
Accordingly, a date code of 3701 signifies
that the tire was manufactured in week 37,
2001.
Car care 271
life of the tire is only just over 2,000 miles Tools under a panel in the trunk
Driving with a compact wheel (approx. 3,500 km).
fitted • Refit the standard tire as soon as possi-
ble.
Important considerations when driving with
WARNING a compact spare tire: NOTICE
• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). The • The car’s ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damaging a alloy wheel of a
tire can overheat affecting the car’s • The car must not be driven with more than punctured tire, this can be temporarily
roadholding. one compact spare tire at a time. placed outside up in the spare wheel well
but only while driving to the closest work-
• Tire pressure: refer to page 304. • Avoid driving against the curb. shop.
• The spare tire or punctured tire must • Do not use snow chains.
As a general rule, all heavy loads must be
be stowed under the trunk floor, and • Do not fit the wheel cover - this would well secured in the trunk (see page 149).
secured in place with the retaining nut. conceal the warning text.
Observe the following when the compact

spare tire is fitted:
• The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing a tire.
• Do not drive further than necessary with
the compact spare fitted - the maximum
272 Car care

Car care 273

Changing a tire To be even more certain the vehicle won't • The jack should be stored correctly
move, you should put blocks at the front under the carpeting in the trunk. If it
and rear of the tire farthest away from the lies loose in the car, it could thrown
WARNING one being changed. That would be the forward and cause personal injury in
tire, on the other side, at the opposite end the event of a crash or if the car rolls
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do of the vehicle. over.
maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment • The car jack is designed solely for use • Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner
and training. The jack provided with your in changing a tire or fitting snow threads of the wheel bolts if the car has
vehicle is designed only for changing a chains. It must not be used to been driven for several years exclu-
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you support the car during repair work sively with alloy wheels.
or others could be badly injured or killed if or servicing. If steel wheels are being installed, the
the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the jack bolt hole threads in the brake hubs
provided with your vehicle only for chang- • Never crawl under a car that is should be cleaned before the thinner
ing a flat tire. supported only by a jack. Always use steel wheels are fitted. It may other-
axle stands. wise not be possible to achieve the
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The correct clamping force, despite tight-
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over • Raising your vehicle too high or with ening the wheel bolts to the correct
or fall on you or other people. You and the jack improperly positioned can torque.
they could be badly injured or even killed. damage the vehicle and even make
Find a level place to change your tire. To the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
help prevent the vehicle from moving: injury and vehicle damage, be sure to
fit the jack lift head into the proper
1 Set the parking brake firmly. location before raising the vehicle, and
2 If you have an automatic transmis- raise the vehicle only far enough off
sion, put the shift lever in PARK (P). the ground so there is enough room for
For a manual transmission, leave the the spare tire to fit (no more than
car in gear (1st or REVERSE (R)). 25 mm or 1 inch clearance between
3 Turn off the engine and do not restart the ground and the bottom of the tire).
while the vehicle is raised. • Switch on the hazard warning lights if
4 Do not allow passengers to remain in the car is on a road.
the vehicle.
274 Car care

When the car has to be lifted, the jack must
be positioned at one of the four jacking
points (front or rear) under the sill members.
If a floor jack is used, the lifting plate must
be positioned under the normal jacking
points, see illustration. If the car is equipped
with a towbar, the jack can also be placed
under this.
NOTICE
Apply the jack only to the jacking points
indicated on the body.
Marking of jacking points Jacking points
1 Wind the jack up to a suitable height
before placing it under the jacking point.
Each jacking point is indicated by an 2 It is not necessary to remove the wheel 4 Clean any rust or dirt from the contact
arrow on the sill (see illustration). cover. surfaces between the wheel and brake
Make sure that the jack fully engages If, none the less, you wish to remove the disc. Do not wipe away the grease in the
the jacking point in the underside of the wheel cover, take hold of the outer edge wheel hub.
sill member and that the entire foot of the and pull it straight out.
jack is steady and flat on the ground. 5 Add a thin layer of grease on the bolts
Loosen the wheel bolts half a turn. before fitting, see page 276. Fit the
The jack must not stand on snow, ice or
similar. 3 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of wheel and screw in the bolts in the
Wind up the jack until it just begins to lift the ground. Remove the wheel bolts and sequence shown on page 276 (opposite
the car. lift off the wheel. pairs).
Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts
and wheel to be seated correctly.
6 Lower the car and tighten the wheel
bolts to torque in sequence as shown on
page 276.
Tightening torque:
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
Car care 275
Jacking points for floor jack Clean any rust or dirt from the contact sur- Do not wipe away the grease in the wheel
faces between the wheel and brake disc. hub.
NOTICE
7 Retouching the wheel bolts after twenty
• Do not overtighten the bolts using a or so miles.
impact wrench: not only can this Tightening torque:
damage the wheels but it can also Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
make it impossible to undo the bolts Steel wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
using the wheel wrench in the car’s We advise against using wheels with large
toolkit. ventilation slots in winter, as the brake com-
• When refitting a wheel cover, make ponents are then more exposed to slush,
sure that the valve protrudes through road salt and grit.
the marked recess in the wheel cover. If you fit wheels of a different dimension, the
speedometer can be reprogrammed to
ensure it is as accurate as possible. We rec-
ommend that you contact a Saab dealer.
Driving with tire chains 3, see page 196
276 Car care
Safety belts Upholstery and trim

To remove fluff and hairs from the seats,
door armrests and headlining, use a
WARNING vacuum cleaner, a moist lint-free cloth, or a
clothes brush. Remove spots and dirt using
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety a cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy
belts, belt pretensioners and other asso- water.
ciated components must be inspected.
We recommend that you contact a Saab When using a stain remover, always work
dealer. from the outside towards the centre to avoid
leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should
Never make any alterations or repairs to remain, it can usually be removed using
the safety belts yourself. We recommend lukewarm soapy water or water alone.
that you contact a Saab dealer dealer. Spots left by liquids, such as soft drinks or
Grease the surfaces indicated with a thin thin oil, must be removed at once with an
layer of grease Check the function of the safety belts regu- absorbent material, such as kitchen towel-
larly as follows: ling. Then clean with a stain remover.
• Hold the diagonal strap and pull it sharply. White spirit is recommended for removing
The safety belt should lock and it should grease and oil stains. A medium stiff brush
not be possible to withdraw it further. may also be used.
Tightening sequence, wheel bolts Check the anchorage points in the floor.
They must not have suffered rust damage.
If a belt is worn or has any fraying edges, it
should be replaced.
Safety belts must not come into contact with
substances such as polishes, oil or chemi-
cals. If the belts get dirty, wash them with
warm water and a detergent or have them
replaced.
Car care 277

Cleaning and caring for leather Textile carpeting Washing
upholstery
Textile carpeting should be vacuum The bodywork must be washed frequently.
The principal reason for treating leather cleaned regularly. Carpeting can also be When the car is new, the body should be
upholstery is to maintain its elegant appear- cleaned using a brush or sponge and carpet washed by hand using plain cold water and
ance and to provide it with a protective film. shampoo. a clean, soft brush through which the water
Disco lour at ion caused by dust and wear flows. Automatic caresses should be
mainly affects the lighter shades, although For safety reasons, vacuum cleaners that
are not earthed (grounded) must not be avoided when the car is new.
this is not detrimental to the leather, indeed,
the patina resulting from use is often consid- used out of doors. After 5–6 months the paintwork will have
ered desirable in leather. But if the leather is hardened. To facilitate cleaning, a suitable
allowed to become too grubby, it can start to detergent can be added to the water, which
look shabby. Engine bay should be lukewarm.
The leather upholstery should be cleaned The engine bay should be cleaned with an Remove any bird droppings without delay,
and reconditioned twice a year in conjunc- engine decreasing and rinsed with hot as these can discolor the paintwork and
tion with spring and autumn inspections. In water. The headlights must be covered prove difficult to polish out. Lay a wad of wet
very warm, dry climates the leather may over. Do not use a pressure washer. Avoid paper on the patch of dirt and leave it for a
need more regular reconditioning. Use con- spraying electrical components and con- minute or so. It will then be easy to wash off
ventional leather care products. Follow the nectors. the dirt.
instructions on the packaging. Do not use petrol as a cleaning agent or sol- Use a soft cloth moistened with white spirit
Do not use unknown harsh polishing vent when carrying out repairs or mainte- to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do not
agents, cleaning agents, sprays, coarse nance. Saab recommends the use of envi- use strong cleaners, as these can dry out
soap or hot water. ronmentally-friendly decrescendos. the paintwork.
NOTICE
Do not use alcohol-based cleaners on the
plastic lenses of the front or rear lights, as
these can cause a crackling effect on the
lenses.
The door mirrors should be folded in
before the car enters an automatic car
wash.
The underside of the car also needs wash-

ing regularly, and this should be done extra
278 Car care

thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the Convertible:
underside of the car by hand if the car is usu- NOTICE
ally washed in an automatic car wash with- • Wash the soft top with a mild soap solu-
out special facilities for underbody cleaning. tion and lukewarm water. For spot clean-
ing the top, a finger nail brush can also be • Try your brakes on leaving a car wash.
Never wash or leave the car to dry in the used. Stroke the brush in the direction of Wet brake discs reduce the perfor-
sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather the fabric, not across the threads. mance of the brakes.
immediately after washing to avoid smears
and streaks. • If a pressure washer is used be heedful of • Fixed antennae, such as for a mobile
the following recommendations: phone, must be removed if the car
Clean the inside of window glass using a
proprietary window cleaner. This is particu- • on the lower part of the car (not higher goes through an automatic car wash.
larly important when the car is new, as than the door handles): max pressure
of 100 bar and not closer than 8 in. • Cars with Saab Parking Assistance:
upholstery and trim have a tendency to Do not spray the sensors or closer
sweat a little at first. (20 cm).
• on the upper part of the car: tax pres- than 8 in. (20 cm) to the sensors with
Keep the glass well polished, as this helps a pressure washer, as this can
to prevent misting. sure of 100 bar and not closer than
32 in. (80 cm). damage them.
Clean the outside of the windows with Saab
washer fluid. This is especially important if • Do not use any drying chemicals or water-
the car has been washed in an automatic proofing agents.
car wash, as sometimes a wax treatment is • Avoid automatic car washes.
used that can contaminate the windshield
and impair the performance of the wipers.
In the U.S., Saab offers a full complement of
car care products. See your dealer or visit
us at www.saabcatalog.com.
Car care 279

Waxing and polishing ble, the damaged area should be taken
back to the bare metal. The metal should
Do not wax a new car during the first three then be primed with two thin coats of primer
or four months. In fact, there is no need to applied by brush.
polish the car before the paintwork has After the primer has dried, apply several thin
started to dull through oxidation. Other than layers of topcoat until the surface of the
in exceptional cases, do not use abrasive repaired area is flush with the surrounding
polishes containing a cutting agent on a new paintwork.
car. Always wash the car thoroughly before
waxing or polishing. Stir both primer and touch-up paint thor-
oughly before use and allow each coat to
dry before applying the next.
Touching up the paint Two-coat enamel
Damaged paintwork should be treated as As the name implies, two-coat enamel is
soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left, Surface treatment composition
applied in two operations. The first coat, the 1 Body panel
the greater the risk of corrosion. The anti- base color, contains the pigment, metal 2 Zinc (certain components only) 7.5 µm
corrosion warranty does not cover corrosion flakes and binder. The second coat consists 3 Phosphate coating 3 –5 µm
resulting from untreated defects. of a clear enamel, which provides the final 4 Cathodic ED 23 µm
Paintwork damage sustained in a crash is gloss for the paintwork and protects the 5 Intermediate coat 35 µm
6 Metallic base/solid base 11 µm
usually extensive and can only be properly base from moisture and environmental con- 7 Clear enamel 45 µm
restored by professionals. taminants.
However, you can repair small scratches Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:
and stone chip damage yourself. The nec- 1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.
essary tools and materials, such as primer,
touch-up paint and brushes, are available 2 Then apply the primer, base color and
from a workshop. We recommend that you finally, the clear enamel. To achieve the
contact a Saab dealer. best finish, apply two or three coats of
primer.
In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,
where the metal has not been exposed and
an undamaged layer of paint remains,
touch-up paint can usually be applied
directly, after any dirt has been scraped
away using a pointed knife.
If corrosion has already set in, such as the
result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed
knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possi-
280 Car care
Anti-corrosion Use a hose to clean the underside of the car

thoroughly. After it has dried, use a brush or
What causes rust?
Steel body panels of automobiles are sub-
treatment spray to apply a viscous anti-corrosion ject to rusting whenever air and moisture
agent to any worn or damaged areas, to manage to penetrate the protective finish.
The entire car undergoes a series of anti- prevent the onset of corrosion.
corrosion processes during production. Body panels may rust through if the process
These include electrophoretic priming, Even after the anti-corrosion warranty has is unchecked. Rusting can occur wherever
PVC-based coating to protect against stone expired, it makes good sense to continue to water is trapped or where the car’s panels
chip damage and corrosion, and treatment maintain the rustproofing. are continuously damp.
of body cavities and members with thin, Seams in the body, especially those in the Damage to paint and undercoating by
penetrating rustproofing oil. doors and trunk lid, are particularly vulnera- stones, gravel and minor crashes immedi-
In addition, most body panels, such as the ble to corrosion from the outside, caused by ately exposes metal to air and moisture.
hood, doors and floor pan are galvanized. grit and salt thrown up from the road, and to Road salts used for de-icing will collect on
corrosion from the inside, largely as a result the bottom of the car and promote rusting.
The anti-corrosion treatment on some parts of condensation. Keep the seams clean and
of the car is constantly exposed to wear and Areas of the country with high humidity have
at the first sign of any rust, apply a thin, pen- a greater potential for rust problems, espe-
prone to damage. This applies particularly etrating, anti-corrosion oil. Your Saab
to the underside of the car and inside the cially where salt is used on roads or there is
dealer will be pleased to give you further moist sea air. Industrial pollution (fallout)
wheel arches, where grit, road salt and the advice.
like that are thrown up can give rise to cor- may also damage paint and promote rust-
rosion where the underseal has worn away. ing.
The extent of this obviously depends on the
conditions in which the car is used.
Accordingly, make it a habit to hose the
underside of the car often and to inspect the
condition of the underseal. The anti-corro-
sion warranty does not relieve the car owner
of the need to carry out normal maintenance
to the rustproofing and to make good any
damage.
Car care 281

Preventive maintenance 2 Clean the underside of the car during Inspect the undercoating and touch up if
The following procedures are necessary to the winter. Use high pressure water to necessary. Pay particular attention to the
help protect against rusting. Refer also to clean the car’s underside (floor panels, fenders and wheel housings, which are
the terms and conditions of the Performa- wheel wells) at least at mid-winter and in exposed to abrasion by flying gravel, etc. If
tion Limited Warranty described in the war- the spring. the composition has worn or flaked off, the
ranty booklet. 3 Inspect the car frequently for leaks or steel must be thoroughly cleaned and dried
damage, and arrange for needed before a fresh coat is applied. The cleaning
1 Wash the car frequently, and wax at repairs promptly. After washing or after is best done with a scraper and a steel wire
least twice a year. Under adverse heavy rain, check for leaks. When wash- brush, followed by washing with solvent.
conditions, where there is a rapid ing the car inspect body surfaces for Apply the new coating thinly, otherwise it
buildup of dirt, sand or road salt, wash paint damage. While checking for leaks, may run off or fall off when dry.
your car at least once a week. After lift the floor mats and check underneath
extreme exposure to salted snow or them. Water can collect in these areas
slush, evidenced by a white film on the and remain for prolonged periods. Dry
car, wash the car immediately. Frequent any wet areas including the floor mats.
washing will prevent paint damage from Have leaks repaired as soon as possi-
acid rain and other airborne contami- ble.
nants such as tree sap and bird drop- Use touch-up paint to repair small
pings. If any of these contaminants are scratches or minor finish damage. Areas
noticed on the car the finish should be where metal is exposed will rust quickly
washed immediately. and MUST be repaired immediately by
• Begin washing by rinsing the entire car touch-up or professional repainting.
with water to loosen and flush off heavy Rust must be removed, the bare metal
concentrations of dirt (include the primed and painted. Major body
underbody). damage should be repaired immediately
• Sponge the car with a solution of either and new panels or exposed areas
a good quality car soap or mild general should be undercoated with anti- corro-
purpose (dish washing) detergent and sion material.
water. Repairs of this type are the owner’s
• Rinse car thoroughly with clean water. responsibility and are not covered under
• After washing, check and clear all warranty.
drains in doors and body panels.
• Wipe the car dry, preferably using a
chamois.
282 Car care
Recovery and/or Air conditioning (A/C) Troubleshooting

If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are
recycling of automotive a number of checks you can perform your-
materials WARNING self. If the fault persists, however, have the
system checked at a workshop. We recom-
A typical car consists of metals (65–75 %), • All repairs and adjustments to the A/C mend that you contact a Saab dealer.
plastics (10–15 %), rubber (5 %) and small system must be carried out at a Saab
quantities of glass, wood, paper and tex- dealer authorized for this kind of work. Note:
tiles. The recycling of metals has been com- When the A/C system is running, the intake
monplace for a long time now. • The A/C system is pressurized. Do not
break any connections or undo A/C air is dehumidified. The resultant condensa-
To facilitate the sorting of other materials, system components. tion that forms on the evaporator is drained
plastic parts, for instance, have been off under the car. When the car is parked,
marked to identify the precise nature of the • Escaping gas can cause eye injury or this may result in a small puddle forming on
plastic. other personal injury. the ground. The warmer the air and the
higher the relative humidity, the more con-
densation will be produced.
NOTICE
Inadequate cooling
• The A/C system is designed for use a Check that the controls for temperature
with R134a refrigerant. and air distribution are correctly set; see
• Refrigerant handling requires special “Manual climate-control system 3” on
equipment and special procedures for page 110.
charging and draining the system. b Check that the condenser (in front of the
radiator) has not become clogged with
• Never mix R 134a with other refriger-
dirt and insects.
ants.
c Make sure that the compressor drive
belt does not slip (see page 229).
d Check the fuses for the ventilation fans
and compressor (see page 249).
Car care 283

Maintenance Other than in extremely cold weather, do not
screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this
Headlight aiming
will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.
NOTICE
• Applicable to the manual climate control WARNING
Do not use a pressure washer when system - During cold months the air condi-
cleaning the condenser or radiator due to tioning should be switched on once or Before checking/adjusting the headlight
the risk of damage. twice a month and run for 5–10 minutes aiming, switch off the engine to avoid
during highway driving once the engine is danger of fingers and hands being injured
warm. by moving parts.
• The compressor drive belt should be
inspected under the regular service This action saves the gaskets in the The radiator fan can start up even when
program. compressor from being spoiled. The the engine is switched off.
compressor uses a lubricant that circu-
• Clean away dirt and insects from the lates with the coolant.
condenser and radiator to prevent clog- The vehicle has a visual optical headlight
ging. When washing the car, use the hose Note: aiming system equipped with vertical
to spray the radiator and condenser aiming device. The aim has been preset at
(located in front of the radiator) from both The A/C system cannot be switched on the factory and should normally not need
sides (both from the front of the car and when the outside temperature is below 32°F further adjustments.
from inside the engine bay). Do not use a (0°C). Turn on the A/C system when the car
is standing in a warm place. Simplest is to If your headlights are damaged in a crash,
pressure washer. the headlight aim may be affected. If you
Caution: Do not hose down the radia- always have the A/C button pressed in. The
A/C system will then cut in automatically believe your headlights need to be re-
tor and condenser while the engine is aimed, we recommend that you take it to
hot. when the outside temperature is high
enough. your Saab dealer for service. However, it is
possible for you to re-aim your headlights as
described in the following procedure.
NOTICE
To make sure that your headlights are
aimed properly read all instructions
before beginning. Failure to follow these
instructions could cause damage to
headlight parts or a not correctly aimed
headlight.
284 Car care
1 Wall or garage door. Vertical aiming device

2 25 ft (7.6 m) between wall and headlight lens.
3 Measurement from the ground to the low beam aiming marker on the headlight lens.
4 Same measurement as (3) but substract 2 inches.
To check the aim, the vehicle should be • The vehicle should be unloaded and fuel
properly prepared as follows: tank full, and one person or 160 lbs.
(75 kg) on the drivers seat. 1 Aiming marker on headlight lens
• The vehicle shall be placed so that the
headlights are 25 ft (7.6 m) from a light • The vehicle should be fully assembled
colored wall or other flat surface. The and all other work stopped while headlight
aiming area should be darkened, this will aiming is being done.
improve your ability to see the beam of the • The vehicle should not have any snow, ice
low beam headlight being aimed. or mud attached to it.
An optical headlamp aimer can also be • Tires should be inflated to the prescribed
used and will than replace the wall. pressure.
• The vehicle must have all four wheels on • Close all doors.
a perfectly level surface which is level all • Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspen-
the way to the wall or other flat surface. sion.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is per- Headlight aiming is done with the vehicle
pendicular to the wall or other flat surface. low beam lamps. The high beam lamps will
Car care 285

be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps
are aimed properly.
If you find that the headlight needs adjust-
ment follow these steps:
1 Open the hood and locate the vertical
aiming devices there are two vertical
aiming devices which shall be turned
simultaneously and the same amount of
turns.
2 Locate the marker on the lens.
3 Measure the distance from the ground to
the aim marker No.1 on each lens.
Subtract 2 inches.
4 At the wall or other flat surface, measure Horizontal line on wall or other flat surface Correctly adjusted low beam
from the ground to the recorded
distance (see point 4) and draw a hori-
zontal line the width of the vehicle. Then follow the instructions in the optical
5 Cars with xenon lights: headlight aimer instruction manual and
NOTICE point 1, 2, 5, and 6 in this instruction.
Xenon lights with automatic headlight
levelling system must first do a refer- Do not cover a headlight directly on the
ence run before aiming: Start the engine lens to improve beam cut-off when
and let the headlights do a reference aiming. Covering a headlight may cause
run. Turn off the engine but leave the low excessive heat build-up that may cause
beam on. damage to the headlight.
Cars with halogen lights:
Turn on the low beam headlights. 6 Turn the two vertical aiming screws
Both variants: simultaneously in the same direction
Place a piece of cardboard or equivalent indicated on the headlight until the hori-
(although not directly on the lens) in front zontal cut-off of the headlight is aligned
of the headlight not being aimed. This with the horizontal line on the wall.
should allow the beam cut-off of the
headlight being aimed to be seen on the 7 If an optical headlight aimer device is
flat surface. used follow point 1 and 2 and center the
lens of the optical headlight aimer
device at the intersection of the two
markers on the headlight lens.
286 Car care

Customer Assistance and Information
Maintenance schedule __ 288

Owner assistance ______ 290
Reporting Safety Defects
(USA) _______________ 291
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
government__________ 291
Vehicle Data Collection
and Event Data
Recorders ___________ 292

288 Customer Assistance and Information
Maintenance schedule SERVICE INTERVALS TIME FOR MAIN SERVICE will be set when
additional maintenance is necessary, such
A time for service message will illuminate on
The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a as air filter or spark plug replacement. When
the Saab Instrument Display (SID) when the
service program to the purchaser/operator the message Time for service. is displayed,
car is due for regular maintenance. There
of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary are three different messages that will contact your Saab Dealer for a service
to ensure the proper emission control sys- appear: appointment.
tems function, safety and reliability of the Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
Saab automobile in normal use. Additional in a timely manner may result in serious
TIME FOR INTERMEDIATE SERVICE
maintenance is recommended for specific damage to key components or systems.
components when the car is operated under indicates that an oil/filter change is required
certain severe conditions. Proper mainte- along with several inspections. This mes-
nance is always a good practice! sage is set by the engine management
system which calculates service intervals
Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and based on several factors including driving
trained to meet your Saab’s service needs. habits, ambient temperature, number of
They regularly receive up-to-date Saab ser- cold starts, mileage driven and elapsed time
vice manuals and parts and technical ser-
since the last service. If mileage accumula-
vice bulletins from Saab and are able,
tion does not occur, the message will be set,
through their franchise agreement, to attend
and maintenance required at a maximum of
Saab service schools, obtain Saab special 2 years.
tools and technical assistance and pur-
chase original equipment service and TIME FOR MAIN AND INTERMEDIATE
replacement parts.
SERVICE
Today’s complex automobiles should only indicates that an oil/filter change is required
be entrusted to the most knowledgeable
along with several inspections and addi-
service professionals. A Saab dealer is your
tional maintenance such as air filter or spark
best choice.
plug replacement.

Engine oil and filter changes Service record retention Service costs
Changing the engine oil and filter is required It is the owner’s responsibility to retain ser- Dealer pricing practices and labor for ser-
at every service point. Use only a Saab vice records. If possible, you should keep vice work vary. Saab’s recommended ser-
approved long-life oil filter and engine oils copies of all shop work orders for all service vice times for each service point do not
meeting the SAE viscosity ratings and API and repairs, whenever performed. As indi- include the labor required to replace wear
service classifications stated in the “Techni- cated in the new car and emission control items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or
cal data” section of this Owner’s Manual. system warranties, it is important to docu- tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or
The use of extra additives in the oil is not ment that all necessary maintenance has repairs found to be necessary as a result of
necessary and is not recommended, and been done. the inspections included in these times.
may be harmful to turbochargers. Additional labor and parts will be charged
More frequent oil changes are recom- HOW THE SERVICE RECORD IS ORGA- for such work when necessary, except as
mended if your vehicle is operated under NIZED covered under an applicable Saab warranty
any of the following conditions: The service record is comprised of a series or any optional extended service contract.
of coupons on which to record services as Transmission fluid changes or suspension
• Most trips are less than 5–10 miles (8– they are performed. There are additional alignment, when necessary, are also addi-
16 km). This is particularly important coupons for documenting extra engine oil tional.
when outside temperatures are below and filter changes, extra automatic trans- Dealer charges for general shop material,
freezing. mission fluid services necessary for severe regulated hazardous waste removal, recy-
• Most trips include extensive idling service conditions, and brake fluid changes. cling expenses or other operation costs may
(frequent stop-and-go traffic). also be applied to service and repair
• Most trips are through dusty areas (such HOW TO USE THE SERVICE RECORD invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and
as construction zones). COUPONS location.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service, When the car is brought to a Saab dealer for
police, taxi or other commercial applica- scheduled maintenance, present the War-
tions. ranties & Service Record Booklet to the ser-
If your driving habits match this description, vice manager. When the technician has
have the engine oil and filter changed in- completed the service, the technician will
between normal services. These conditions sign the maintenance record. The person
cause the engine oil to break down faster. responsible for quality assurance at the
The Warranties and Service Record Book- dealership will also sign and stamp the
let has provisions to record extra oil record with the dealer identification stamp.
changes.
Owner assistance Change of Address Notification

(U.S. and Canada)
Warranties and service problem Two change of address cards are provided
assistance at the end of the Warranties and Service
Record Booklet. Knowing your current
For complete information about all applica-
address allows Saab to contact you in the
ble warranties, including the New Car War-
event of a recall or service campaign.
ranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emis- Please help us keep our records up to date
sion Warranty and Emission Perforation for your own peace of mind.
Warranty, consult the Warranties and Ser-
vice Record Booklet which accompanies Service information
this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner
assistance information including Saab Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-3
Roadside Assistance. If the booklet is lost or and 9-5 car lines can be ordered through
misplaced, a new one may be ordered your dealer. These are comprehensive
through a Saab dealer or by contacting manuals on CD rom, geared to use by pro-
Saab. fessional technicians. Consult your Saab
dealer for prices for your model.
In the U.S. there is a national Customer
Assistance Center at Saab Cars USA, Inc.
The toll-free number to call from all 50 states
is 1-800-955-9007.
In Canada, please call the Saab Customer
Assistance Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
A list of authorized Saab sales and service
dealers is available for those planning to
travel in the United States and Canada.
Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the
Customer Assistance Center in the country
in which they are traveling.

Reporting Safety Reporting Safety
Defects (USA) Defects to the Canadian
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect government
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately If you live in Canada, and believe that your
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety vehicle has a safety defect, you should
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti- immediately notify Transport Canada, in
fying Saab Cars USA, Inc. addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds that You may write to Transport Canada at Box
a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, 8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.
it may order a recall and remedy campaign. In addition to notifying Transport Canada in
However, NHTSA cannot become involved a situation like this, we certainly hope you
in individual problems between you, your will notify us. In Canada, please call our
dealer, or Saab Cars USA, Inc. Saab Customer Assistance Centre at 1-
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the 800-263-1999.
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424- Or write:
9393 (or 202/366-0123 in Washington D.C. General Motors of Canada Limited
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department Customer Assistance Centre,
of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive,
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.

Vehicle Data Collection and To read this information, special equipment
Event Data Recorders is needed and access to the vehicle or the
SDM is required.
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehi-
cles, has a number of sophisticated com- Saab will not access information about a
puter systems that monitor and control sev- crash event or share it with others other than
eral aspects of the vehicle’s performance. • with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle comput- the vehicle is leased, with the consent of
ers to monitor emission control components the lessee,
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor condi-
tions for air bag deployment and, if so • in response to an official request of police
or similar government office,
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and
to help the driver control the vehicle in diffi- • as part of Saab’s defense of litigation
cult driving situations. Some information through the discovery process, or
may be stored during regular operations to • as required by law.
facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; In addition, once Saab collects or receives
other information is stored only in a crash data, Saab may
event by computer systems commonly
called event data recorders (EDR). • use the data for Saab research needs,
In a crash event, computer systems, such • make it available for research where
as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic appropriate confidentiality is to be main-
Module (SDM) in your vehicle may record tained and need is shown, or
information about the condition of the vehi- • share summary data which is not tied to a
cle and how it was operated, such as data specific vehicle with non-Saab organiza-
related to engine speed, brake application, tions for research purposes.
throttle position, vehicle speed, steering Others, such as law enforcement, may have
wheel angle, lateral acceleration, safety belt access to the special equipment that can
usage, air bag readiness, air bag perfor- read the information if they have access to
mance, and the severity of a collision. This the vehicle or SDM.
information has been used to improve vehi- If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®,
cle crash performance and may be used to please check the OnStar® subscription ser-
improve crash performance of future vehi- vice agreement or manual for information
cles and driving safety. Unlike the data on its operations and data collection.
recorders on many airplanes, these on-
board systems do not record sounds, such
as conversation of vehicle occupants.
Technical data 293
Technical data
General data __________ 294

Engine _______________ 297
Engine oil_____________ 298
Fuel__________________ 299
Engines ______________ 300
Electrical system_______ 300
Drive belt _____________ 301
Manual transmission ___ 301
Automatic transmission _ 302
Suspension ___________ 302
Steering ______________ 302
Brake system__________ 303
Wheels and tires _______ 304
Plates and labels _______ 307

294 Technical data

General data
Overall length, including bumpers: ___
Sport Sedan and Convertible _________ 182.5'' (4635 mm)
SportCombi_______________________ 183.2'' (4654 mm)
Overall width, including door mirrors __ 80.2'' (2038 mm) V.I.N. label on vehi- V.I.N. label on vehicles sold in Canada
Maximum height _________________ 60.6'' (1539 mm) cles sold in U.S.A.
Wheelbase _____________________ 105.3'' (2675 mm) Permissible load (in addition to the driver) = GVW minus curb weight. The maximum
permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
Track: The precise curb weight of the vehicle and load capacity are specified in the vehicle
Front ____________________________ 59.8'' (1524 mm) registration documents.
Rear ____________________________ 59.3'' (1506 mm)

Ground clearance at GVW _________ approx. 120 mm Trunk length, Sport Sedan:
Number of seats (incl. driver): Rear seat raised ___________________ 40.8'' (1036 mm)
Sport Sedan and SportCombi ________ 5 Rear seat lowered _________________ 69.8'' (1774 mm)
Convertible _______________________ 4 Trunk length, Convertible __________ 29.1" (740 mm)
Turning circle: Trunk length, SportCombi:
Measured at vehicle extremities _______ 37.4 ft. (11.4 m) Rear seat raised ___________________ 39.9'' (1013 mm)
cars with V6 engine ________________ 40.0 ft. (12.2 m) Rear seat lowered _________________ 70.0'' (1777 mm)
Trunk volume (VDA):
Sport Sedan ______________________ 15.0 cu.ft. (425 l)
Convertible, soft top raised___________ 12.4 cu.ft. (352 l)
Convertible, soft top folded___________ 8.3 cu.ft. (235 l)
SportCombi ______________________ 14.8 cu.ft. (419 l)
SportCombi with rear seat lowered ____ 45.0 cu.ft. (1273 l)
Technical data 295

Curb weight Maximum roof load, Sport Sedan and Sport-
(i.e. with full fuel tank, full washer fluid res- Combi ________________________ 220 lbs. (100 kg)
ervoir, standard tools and spare wheel): Maximum load in trunk, Sport Sedan, Con-
Sport Sedan ______________________ 3200–3420 lbs. vertible and SportCombi__________ 175 lbs. (80 kg)
(1450–1550 kg) The combined weight of occupants and
Convertible _______________________ 3570–3700 lbs. cargo should never exceed:
(1620–1680 kg) Sport Sedan and SportCombi ________ 925 lbs. (420 kg)
SportCombi_______________________ xx Convertible _______________________ 775 lbs. (352 kg)
Gross vehicle weight (GVW): Maximum combined weight of driver and
Sport Sedan ______________________ 4120–4340 lbs. passengers ___________________
(1870–1970 kg) Sport Sedan and SportCombi
Convertible _______________________ 4460–4520 lbs. (5x150 lbs.)_______________________ 750 lbs. (340 kg)
(2025–2050 kg) Convertible (4x150 lbs.) _____________ 600 lbs. (272 kg)
SportCombi_______________________ xx
Maximum axle load:
Sport Sedan, front _________________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)
Sport Sedan, rear __________________ 2230 lbs. (1010 kg)
Convertible, front __________________ 2540 lbs. (1150 kg)
Convertible, rear ___________________ 2310 lbs. (1050 kg)
SportCombi_______________________ xx
SportCombi_______________________ xx
Weight distribution:
Curb weight + driver (150 lbs. (68 kg)),
front/rear, Sport Sedan and SportCombi approx. 60/40 %
GVW, front/rear, Sport Sedan and Sport-
Combi ___________________________ approx. 50/50 %
296 Technical data
Trailer:
WARNING
Trailer with brakes ________________ Max. 3500 lbs.
• The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded. (1588 kg)
Note that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are Trailer without brakes _____________ Max. 1000 lbs.
fitted, the available load capacity is reduced by the weight of (450 kg)
these.
Recommended towball load ________ 110–165 lbs.
• When carrying a load in the trunk, make sure that it is lashed (50–75 kg)
down securely, particularly when part or all of the rear seat is See also page 200.
folded down. Maximum theoretical towing speed, trailer
with brakes ____________________ 60 mph (100 km/h)
When towing a trailer, increase the pressure
of the rear tires by 20 kPa (3 psi).
The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by
Saab Automobile AB.
Note that national restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and
weights (see page 198).
Technical data 297

Engine Idling speed ____________________ 720 rpm.
When the engine
Type: load increases, e.g.
Petrol engine, 4-cyl. ________________ Four cylinders, the steering wheel
double overhead is turned, the idling
camshafts, speed is raised to
16 valves, two 900 rpm.
balancer shafts Antifreeze ______________________ Saab-approved
Petrol engine, V6 __________________ Six cylinders, antifreeze
4 overhead cam- Coolant capacity:
shafts, 24 valves,
the angle between Petrol engine, 4-cyl. ________________ 7.5 qts. (7.1 l)
the cylinder rows is Petrol engine, V6 __________________ 9.5 qts. (9.0 l)
60°
Cylinder bore:
Petrol engine, 4-cyl. ________________ 3.386'' (86 mm)
Petrol engine, V6 __________________ 3.504'' (89 mm)
Stroke:
Petrol engine, 4-cyl. ________________ 3.386'' (86 mm)
Petrol engine, V6 __________________ 2.945'' (74.8 mm)
Swept volume:
Petrol engine, 4-cyl. ________________ 122 cu.in. (1.998 l)
Petrol engine, V6 __________________ 170 cu.in. (2.792 l)
298 Technical data

Engine oil Servicing/Oil changes:
To be able to use recommended service intervals the need to
To meet demands in Saab's extended service intervals all en- use only approved engine oils is vital. Use only engine oils ap-
gines are filled with specially designed synthetic factory fill oils.
proved for your engine. Service should be done according to
Long service intervals, fuel economy and environmental issues the recommended service intervals to optimize your engine's
are the base for our choice of oil. By using oils approved by function through out its entire life. Saab Automobile AB will not
Saab you minimise the tendencies for oil sludge build, by that
take responsibility for any damage that might occur due to ne-
protecting the engine from harmful, wear increasing, deposits. glecting to meet above mentioned requirements.
Approved oils: At your Saab dealers you can find Saab Genuine or Mobil en-
For all gasoline engines - fully synthetic engine oil - approved gine oils. Among those there are oils specially designed to meet
against the GM-LL-A025 specification - with viscosity SAE 0W- your engines specific needs. We recommend that you, with the
30 or 0W-40. To benefit from Saab´s specified service intervals, help of our skilled service personnel, choose your oil from that
pleasure ensure to select a fully synthetic engine oil approved selection.
against GM-LL-A025. Other oil companies also offer engine oils approved against GM
For optimum performence Saab recommends the use of Saab specifications. Oils meeting these standards may be marked as
Long Life Turbo Oil 0W-30 or Mobil 1 0W-40 European Car For- synthetic. However, not all synthetic engine oils will meet your
mula, but other fully synthetic oils approved against the above engines specific requirements. Please ensure only to use fully
specification and with proper SAE viscosity 0W-30 or 0W-40 synthetic oils approved against your engines specific require-
may also be used. ments, i.e. GM-LL-A025 with viscosity SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-
40.
Recommended oil viscosities.
Viscosity is a measurement of the oil´s thickness at various
temperatures, according to the SAE standard. The thickness in-
fluences e.g. fuel economy and cold starting properties. For op-
timum performance Saab recommends:
For gasoline engines:
SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40 engine oil.
Extra engine oil additives.

Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils are all
you will need for good engine performance and protection.
Technical data 299

When to change engine oil. Fuel
Your vehicle has a display (SID) where time for service will be
shown. Based not only on mileage but also on driving condi- Fuel tank capacity________________ 16.05 U.S. gal. (61 l)
tions the mileage at which a service will be indicated can vary
considerably. For optimum performance Saab recom-
mends: _______________________ 2.0t 175 hp – AON 90.
Under normal circumstances the service indication will come on 2.0T 210 hp – AON 90.
at or around 15 000 miles or 2 years. 2.8 V6 230 hp and
250 hp — AON 90.
For this service system to work it is of outmost importance that Gasoline with a lower octane rating can be used, although not
the right engine oil is used. lower than AON 87. However, engine performance will fall slightly
and heavy loading and laboring should be avoided. For optimum
When the message for service is displayed you need to have performance, use the recommended grade of fuel.
the required service done as soon as possible. For further information on fuel, see page 169.
After the service your service personnel will reset the service in-
dicator. It is important to reset the service indicator in order to
optimize the time to the next service.
Oil capacity, including filter (oil change)

Petrol engine, 4-cyl. ________________ 6.3 qts. (6.0 l)
Petrol engine, V6 __________________ 6.0 qts. (5.7 l)
300 Technical data

Engines Electrical system
2.0t Ecopower Voltage ________________________ 12 V
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 175 hp (129 kW) Battery capacity _________________ 60 Ah
Maximum torque, EEC at 2500 rpm ____ 195 ft.lb. (265 Nm) Starter motor:
Compression ratio__________________ 9.5:1 Petrol engine, 4-cyl. ________________ 1.8 kW
Petrol engine, V6 __________________ 1.4 kW
2.0T Ecopower Alternator rating:
Rating, EEC at 5300 rpm ____________ 210 hp (155 kW) 4-cyl. with manual gearbox___________ 120 A/14 V
Maximum torque, EEC at 2500 rpm ____ 221 ft.lb. (300 Nm) 4-cyl. with automatic gearbox_________ 140 A/14 V
Compression ratio__________________ 9.5:1 V6 engine ________________________ 155 A/14 V
Firing order _____________________
2.8 V6 (230) Ecopower Petrol engine, 4-cyl. ________________ 1-3-4-2
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 230 hp (169 kW) Petrol engine, V6 __________________ 1-2-3-4-5-6
Maximum torque, EEC at 2250 rpm ____ 243 ft.lb. (330 Nm) Spark plugs:
Compression ratio__________________ 10.0:1 Petrol engine, 4-cyl.
Type ____________________________ NGK PFR6T-10G
2.8 V6 (250) Ecopower Electrode gap _____________________ 0.9–1.0 mm
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 250 hp (184 kW) Tightening torque __________________ 20 ft.lb. (28 Nm)
Maximum torque, EEC at 2250 rpm ____ 257 ft.lb. (350 Nm) Petrol engine, V6
Compression ratio__________________ 10.0:1 Type ____________________________ PLFR6C 10G
Electrode gap _____________________ 0.9–1.0 mm
Tightening torque __________________ 20 ft.lb. (28 Nm)
Technical data 301

Drive belt Manual transmission
Outside length ______________________ Type __________________________ Fully synchronized
Petrol engine, 4-cyl. ________________ 40.472'' (1028 mm) with final drive gear
and differential
Petrol engine, V6 __________________ 83.463'' (2120 mm)
Oil type (for topping up)____________ Saab MTF 0063
Oil capacity:
5-speed _________________________ 1.9 qts. (1.8 l), to
level plug
6-speed, 2.0 Turbo _________________ 3.15 qts. (3.0 l)
Speed, mph (km/h) at 1000 rpm in highest
gear (5th gear) _________________ 27–30 (43–48)
Speed, mph (km/h) at 1000 rpm in highest
gear (6th gear) _________________ 29–34 (46–55)
Drive belt, 4-cyl Drive belt, V6

302 Technical data

Automatic transmission Suspension
Type: Spring type, front and rear ____________ Coil springs
5-speed__________________________ Electronically con- Maximum deflection of springs:
trolled, 5-speed, Front ____________________________ 7.0'' (178 mm)
fully-automatic with
hydraulic torque Rear ____________________________ 8.3'' (212 mm)
converter, planetary Dampers, front and rear ______________ Gas-filled dampers
gears and integral
final drive. Steering
Lock-up function in
selector positions 3, Steering __________________________ Power-assisted
4 and 5. steering gear of
6-speed__________________________ Electronically- rack-pinion type and
controlled, 6-speed, telescopic jointed
fully-automatic with steering column
hydraulic torque Number of turns, lock to lock___________ 2.97
converter, planetary Oil type ___________________________ Power steering fluid
gears and integral CHF 11S or
final drive.
CHF 202
Lock-up function for
1st to 6th gear.
Selector lever positions _______________ P, R, N, D, M
Clutch type ________________________ Hydraulic plate
clutches, brake
bands and one-way
couplings
Speed (mph/km/h) at 1000 rpm in top gear:
5-speed__________________________ 46—49
6-speed__________________________ 63
Technical data 303

Brake system Disc diameter:
Foot brake (ABS)____________________ Hydraulic disc Front ____________________________ 11.22 in.
brakes with vacuum (285 mm) **)
servo unit. Diago- Front 3 *) ________________________ 11.81 in.
nally split circuits; (300 mm) **)
ventilated discs on
Rear ____________________________ 10.94 in. (278 mm)
front wheels (some
variants also have Rear 3 *) ________________________ 11.42 in.
ventilated rear (290 mm) **)
discs). EBD function Total friction area of brake pads:
(see page 181).
Front ____________________________ 9.30 in.² (60 cm²)
Park brake _________________________ Acts on rear wheels
Front 3 __________________________ 9.61 in.² (62 cm²)
Brake fluid _________________________ To DOT 4.
Do not use DOT 5. Rear ____________________________ 4.96 in.² (32 cm²)
*)15" wheels and 16" aluminium wheels
must not be fitted to these variants since
the diameter of the brake discs does not
allow this.
**) ventilated
Hydraulic unit for soft top, Convertible

Oil capacity_______________________ 0.6 qt. (0.6 l)
Oil type __________________________ CHF 11S
304 Technical data

Wheels and tires
NOTICE
All season tires
6.5 x 16" _________________________ 215/55 R16 97 H Snow chains:
RF/XL Snow chains must not be fitted to the rear wheels, and may only
7 x 17"___________________________ 225/45 R17 94 V be used with the following wheel-tire combinations:
RF/XL Wheels Tires
7.5 x 17" _________________________ 235/45 R17 94V 6.5 x 16"_______ 215/55 R16 M+S or
Summer tires 215/55 R16
7.5 x 17" _________________________ 235/45 R17 94 W Contact your Saab dealer regarding suitable snow chains.
We recommend that you contact a Saab dealer if you plan to fit Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph
other wheels or tires than those fitted as standard. (50 km/h).
Winter (snow) tires: Snow chains must not be fitted to wheels larger than 16".
6.5 x 16" wheel ____________________ 215/55 R16 93 Q
M+S
7 x 17" wheel _____________________ 225/45 R17 94 Q NOTICE
M+S RF/XL
Wheels larger than 17" must not be fitted for reasons stated on
7.5 x 17" _________________________ 235/45 R17 94 Q page 260.
M+S
Exercise care when driving on uneven roads or against the curb
Compact spare: if the car is heavily laden. This particularly applies to cars with
Wheel ___________________________ 4 x 16" 17" wheels.
Tire _____________________________ 125/85 R16 99 M Permitted wheel offset is 41 mm.
Pressure _________________________ 420 kPa (60 psi)
Maximum life______________________ 2200 miles
(3500 km)
Maximum speed ___________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)
Technical data 305

Recommended tire/engine combinations
2.0t 2.0 Turbo 2.8 V6

All season tires
215/55 R16 97 H RF/XL x – –
225/45 R17 94 V RF/XL x x –
235/45 R17 94 V – – x
Summer tires
235/45 R17 94 W – – x
Winter (snow) tires
215/55 R16 93 Q x x x
225/45 R17 94 Q M+S RF/XL x x –
235/45 R17 94 Q – – x
Wheel sizes
6.5 x 16" x x –
7 x 17" x x –
7.5 x 17" – – x
RF/XL = Reinforced (or Extra Load) tire.

306 Technical data

Recommended lowest tire pressure, cold tires
Tire size Load/speed Front Rear * Do not exceed posted speed limits.
mph (km/h) * psi/kPa psi/kPa By cold tires is meant tires that are the same temperature as the sur-
All season tires rounding air temperature.
215/55 R16 97 H 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 35/240 32/220 The values for tire pressure in table above are for tires at 68°F
XL/RF 4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 35/240 32/220 (20°C).
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 41/280 38/260 The tire pressure will increase as the tires become warm (e.g. during
225/45 R17 94 V 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 35/240 35/240 highway driving), and decrease as they cool.
RF/XL 4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 35/240 35/240 When the temperature of the tires increases or decreases by 10
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 41/280 41/280 degrees the tire pressure will correspondingly increase or decrease
235/45 R17 94 V 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) xx by 2 psi/10 kPa.
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
1–5 pers./100– (160–)
Summer tires
23525/45 R17 94 W 1–3 pers./0–120 (0–190) 35/240 35/240
4–5 pers./0–120 (0–190) 35/240 35/240
1–5 pers./120– (190–) 41/280 41/280
Winter tires
215/55 R16 93 Q 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 35/240 35/240
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 41/280 41/280
225/45 R17 94 Q 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 36/250 36/250
M+S RF/XL 4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 42/290 42/290
235/45 R17 94Q 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) xx
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
Compact spare
125/85 R16 99 M Max 50 (80) 60/420 60/420
Technical data 307

Plates and labels
When contacting your Saab dealer it may
sometimes be necessary to quote the car’s
vehicle identification, engine and gearbox
numbers.
1 V.I.N. number and barcode, inside wind-
shield
2 Gearbox number
3 Engine number
4 USA: Label for color codes (trim and
body). Tire information label can be found
on the B-pillar. See also page 267.
Canada: Label for tire pressure and color
codes (trim and body)
5 Certification label
6 Chassis number (stamped on body).
308 Technical data
Position: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
| | | | | | | | | | | |
Vehicle identifi- Y S 3 F D 4 9 Y X 6 1 016584
cation number:
| | | | | |
1 2 3 4 5 6 = identification codes for certain chassis components
1 Region ________ Y = Northern Europe 4 = 4-door

2 Country _______ S = Sweden 6 Body version ___ 7 = Convertible
5 = 5-door
3 Manufacturer ___ 3 = Saab Automobile AB
5 = 5-speed manual
4 Product line ____ F = 9-3 6 = 6-speed manual
7 Gearbox _______
B = 9-3 Linear 9 = 5-speed automatic
5 Model series ___ D = 9-3 Arc 1 = 6-speed automatic
F = 9-3 Aero S = 2.0t
N = 2.0t (Convertible)
8 Engine variant __ Y = 2.0 Turbo
M = 2.8 V6 (230)
U = 2.8 V6 (250)
9 Check digit_____ 0-9 or X
10 Model year ____ 6 = 2006
1 = Trollhättan
11 Factory _______
6 = Graz
12 Serial number __ 000001-999999
Technical data 309

Several of the systems in your Courtesy Headlamp Feature
Saab can be customized to better • The length of time the lights are on.
suit your individual needs. • Whether the reversing light or tail lights
Contact your Saab dealer should come on as well as the dipped
beam.
Central locking system
Some functions are governed by legal Automatic Climate System (ACC)
requirements and cannot therefore be • To prevent the smell of washer fluid from
reprogrammed. entering the car, recirculation can be acti-
We recommend that you consult a Saab vated automatically while the windshield
dealer for further information. is washed. The recirculation symbol will
Listed below are a number of examples of however not light up. This function is
programmable functions. optional; contact a workshop. We recom-
mend that you contact a Saab dealer.
• Audible confirmation of arming/disarming • Convertible: A/C compressor not
the car alarm. switched off when the soft top is open.
• Automatic unlocking when car stopped
and remote control removed from the igni-
tion switch.
• Trunk lid locked when car driven off or
30 s after being shut.
310 Technical data

Warning and indications that can Hot engine.
Key not accepted.
be shown on the SID Make a safe stop.
Which warnings and indications that can be Run engine on idle.
shown depends on engine variant and car
specification. Airbag malfunction. Remote control battery
Contact Saab dealer. low. Replace battery.
Symbol Text 2: standard key
Use your seatbelt. 0: valet key
Antilock brake malfunction.
Key No: 1
Gearbox malfunction. Steering lock malfunc.
Brake malfunction. Limited performance. Make a safe stop.
Make a safe stop. Contact Saab dealer. Contact Saab dealer.
Contact Saab dealer. Gearbox too hot. Steering wheel locked.
Brake fluid level low. Make a safe stop. Pull out key, turn steering
Make a safe stop. Open hood to cool down. wheel. Try again.
Contact Saab dealer. Battery not charging. Immobilizer failure.
Make a safe stop. Try starting again.
Release parking brake. Contact Saab dealer. Contact Saab dealer.
Headlight levelling
Theft protection failure.
Oil pressure low. malfunction.
Make a safe stop. Contact Saab dealer.
Turn off engine.
Tap brakes lightly before Alarm has been triggered
Low engine oil level. using cruise control. since being armed.
Fill oil now.
Traction control failure. Rear left seat backrest
Engine malfunction. Contact Saab dealer. unlocked.
Stability control failure. Rear right seat backrest
Coolant level low. Contact Saab dealer. unlocked.
Refill.
Washer fluid level low. Parking assistance
Refill. Contact Saab dealer.
Technical data 311

Low tire pressure.
Parking assistance sensor Left rear turn signal
front left.
interference. failure.
Check tires.
Low tire pressure.
Right front turn signal
Close doors. front right
failure.
Check tires.
Tire pressure
Right rear turn signal
Left brake light failure system failure.
failure.
Left rear position light
Left high beam failure. Time for service.
failure.
Right rear position light

Left low beam failure.
failure.
Low tire pressure,
Rear fog light failure. rear left.
Make a safe stop.
Low tire pressure,
Right brake light failure. rear right.
Make a safe stop.
Low tire pressure,
Right high beam failure. front right.
Make a safe stop.
Low tire pressure,
Right low beam failure. front left.
Make a safe stop.
Low tire pressure.
High mounted brake light
rear left.
failure.
Check tires.
Low tire pressure.
Left front turn signal
rear right.
failure.
Check tires.
312 Technical data

Index 313
Index Brakes ________________________

Braking _______________________
180
180
Closing the soft top, Convertible _____ 66
Clutch interlock _________________ 172
Bulb changing __________________ 232 Compact spare _________________ 270
Bulb table _____________________ 246 Compass ______________________ 137
A Buying new tires ________________ 260 Condensation water, A/C _________ 113
Convertible _____________________ 63
A/C __________________________ 113
Convertible, washing _____________ 278
Adjustment, steering wheel ________ 128
Air conditioning _________________ 113 C Coolant _______________________ 222
Crash memory, see EDR _________ 292
Air filter _______________________ 222
Cabin lighting __________________ 141 Cruise control __________________ 179
Airbag _________________________ 32
Cabin lighting, Convertible _________ 80 Cup holder _____________________ 142
Anchorage eyes ________________ 149
Car alarm ______________________ 58
Anti-corrosion treatment __________ 280
Car transport ___________________ 207
Antilock braking system __________ 181
Anti-spin ______________________ 183
Care of air conditioning ___________ 283
Change of address notification _____ 290
D
Ashtrays ______________________ 144
Changing a tire _________________ 273 Date codes, tires ________________ 270
Autochecking of lights, warning and
Changing bulbs _________________ 232 Deep water, driving through _______ 204
indicator lights __________________ 88
Changing engine oil _____________ 220 Definitions and terminology, tire ____ 267
Autodimming _______________ 133, 134
Changing the battery, remote control _ 56 Determining correct load, tires _____ 269
Automatic climate control (ACC) ____ 115
Changing wiper blades ___________ 230 Direction indicator stalk switch _____ 104
Automatic tire pressure monitoring __ 254
Checking the number of remote Direction indicators ______________ 104
Automatic transmission ___________ 173
controls _______________________ 55 Dome light, Convertible ___________ 243
ABS brakes ____________________ 181
Checks before towing a trailer _____ 201 Dome light, Sport Sedan __________ 242
ACC _________________________ 115
Child safety _____________________ 24 Donor battery, boost starting _______ 208
Child safety locks, rear doors _______ 54 Door handles ____________________ 50
Child seats _____________________ 24 Door mirrors ___________________ 132
B Cigarette lighter _________________ 144 Drive belt ______________________ 229
Cleaning the engine bay __________ 277 Drive belt, length ________________ 301
Battery _______________________ 226
Cleaning upholstery _____________ 276 Driver’s seat with memory __________ 21
Bedding-in of new brake pads _____ 171
Climate control system, manual ____ 110 Driving at night _________________ 205
Before towing a trailer ____________ 201
Closing the soft top manually, Driving in cold climates ___________ 195
Brake fluid, grade _______________ 303
Convertible ____________________ 70 Driving in deep water _____________ 204
314 Index
Driving in hot climates ____________
Driving techniques ______________
197
193
Engine temperature gauge _________ 90
Engine, description ______________ 215
G
Driving with a heavy load on hilly Engine, technical data ____________ 297 Gear selector indicator, automatic
roads ________________________ 175 Engines _______________________ 300 transmission ___________________ 92
Driving with a load ______________ 204 Event Data Recorders (EDR) ______ 292 Gearbox number ________________ 307
Driving with a roof load ___________ 202 Extra electrical socket ____________ 144 General safety instructions,
Driving with the compact spare wheel 208 EDR (Event Data Recorders) ______ 292 Convertible ____________________ 64
Driving with the trunk lid open ______ 204 ESP, anti-skid system ____________ 185 Glove box _____________________ 144
Glovebox lighting ________________ 244
GDO, garage door opener _________ 134
E F
Easy entry, Convertible ____________ 75
Economical motoring ____________ 193
Facilitating entry to rear seat,
Convertible ____________________ 75
H
Electric engine heater ____________ 194 Factors affecting fuel consumption __ 193 Handbrake _____________________ 187
Electric heating, front seats ___ 114, 123 Filler cap ______________________ 168 Hazard warning lights ____________ 105
Electric windows ________________ 129 Filling a portable fuel container _____ 169 Head restraint, Convertible _________ 76
Electric windows, Convertible _______ 79 Filling up ______________________ 167 Head restraints __________________ 23
Electrical system, technical data ____ 300 Flat spots, tires _________________ 259 Headlight flasher ________________ 103
Electrically adjustable seats ________ 20 Floor jack _____________________ 274 Headlight levelling _______________ 102
Electronic steering wheel lock _____ 162 Folding down the rear seat ________ 146 Headlights _____________________ 102
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) __ 185 Front fog lights _________________ 104 Heated door mirrors _____________ 114
Emergency opening of the narrow Front towing eye ________________ 205 Hood _________________________ 214
backrest _____________________ 150 Fuel container __________________ 169 Horn __________________________ 128
Emergency operation of the sunroof _ 140 Fuel gauge _____________________ 91 Horn button ____________________ 128
Engine bay, cleaning ____________ 277 Fuel grade _____________________ 299
Engine heater __________________ 194 Fuel information ________________ 169
Engine immobilizer _______________ 57
Engine number _________________ 307
Functions, car alarm ______________ 61
Fuse panel in luggage compartment _ 250
I
Engine oil, checking _____________ 219 Fuse table _____________________ 249 If a tire goes flat _________________ 264
Engine oil, grade ________________ 298 Fuses ________________________ 247 Ignition switch __________________ 160
Engine oil, volume ______________ 299 Immobilizer _____________________ 57
Index 315
Important considerations for driving _ 164 Lighting in luggage compartment, Milometer _______________________ 89
Important information, petrol-engined Convertible ____________________ 81 Mug holder ____________________ 142
cars with catalytic converters _____ 165 Limp-home ____________________ 164 MAXI fuses ____________________ 248
Indicator lights ___________________ 84 Limp-home, automatic transmission _ 175
Inflation, tires __________________ 257 Load carriers, roof _______________ 202
Information about fuel ____________ 169
Instrument illumination, adjusting ___ 103
Load indices, tires _______________ 266
Loading your vehicle _____________ 267
N
Interior lighting _________________ 141 Load-through hatch ______________ 148 New tires, buying ________________ 260
Interior lighting, Convertible ________ 80 Locking a car with flat battery _______ 53 Night driving ___________________ 205
Interior rearview mirror ___________ 133 Locks __________________________ 50 Number plate lighting, changing ____ 244
Intermittent malfunctioning, central Long-term parking _______________ 189
locking _______________________ 52 Luggage compartment ___________ 146
Luggage compartment lighting _ 142, 150
Luggage compartment lighting,
O
J changing _____________________ 244
Luggage compartment lighting,
Oil capacity, engine ______________ 299
Opening handles _________________ 50
Jump starting __________________ 208 Convertible ____________________ 81 Opening the soft top, Convertible ____ 66
LATCH (child safety) ______________ 25 Outside mirrors _________________ 132
Owner assistance _______________ 290
K ORVR ________________________ 216
Key ___________________________ 50
M
Kick-down _____________________ 175 Main instrument panel _____________ 84
Main/dipped beam ______________ 103
P
Maintenance schedule ___________ 288 Panic function, car alarm ___________ 60
L Manual climate control ___________ 110
Manual gear selection ____________ 178
Park Brake Shift Lock ____________ 174
Park Brake Shift Lock, temporary
Labeling, tire sidewall ____________ 264 Manual gearbox ________________ 172 override ______________________ 176
Labels and plates, location ________ 307 Manual tripping of car alarm ________ 60 Parking _______________________ 187
Lashing eyes ___________________ 149 Materials used in the car, reclamation 282 Parking aid ____________________ 190
Laying the car up _______________ 189 Memory, driver’s seat _____________ 21 Parking brake __________________ 187
Leather upholstery, cleaning _______ 277 Messages on SID, Convertible ______ 73 Parking on a hill _________________ 188
316 Index
Pinch protection, electric windows __ 130 Recommendations for automatic Service costs ___________________ 289
Pinch protection, sunroof _________ 140 transmission, towing a trailer _____ 199 Service information ______________ 290
Plates and labels, location ________ 307 Recommendations for manual Service intervals ________________ 288
Polishing and waxing ____________ 279 gearbox, towing a trailer _________ 200 Service record retention __________ 289
Poly-V-belt ____________________ 229 Recommended snow chains _______ 304 Signalling, horn _________________ 128
Portable fuel container ___________ 169 Refueling ______________________ 167 Ski hatch ______________________ 148
Position lights __________________ 102 Remote control __________________ 50 Spare wheel ___________________ 270
Power steering fluid, checking _____ 225 Remote locking malfunction ________ 52 Speed ratings, tires ______________ 266
Power steering fluid, grade ________ 302 Replacement, wheel _____________ 262 Speedometer ____________________ 89
Pressure gauge _________________ 90 Reporting safety defects __________ 291 Starting the engine ______________ 162
Pressure, tires __________________ 257 Rev counter _____________________ 88 Steering wheel adjustment ________ 128
Profiles, customized settings _______ 93 Reversing lights ________________ 105 Steering wheel lock ______________ 162
Rollover Pop-up Bars, Convertible ___ 78 Steps for determining correct load
Roof lighting ___________________ 141 limit _________________________ 269
Q Roof lighting, changing ___________ 242
Running-in _____________________ 171
Storage compartments ___________ 144
Sun visor ______________________ 142
Quality grading, tires _____________ 261 Sunroof _______________________ 138
Quick guide, remote control ________ 51 Switches ______________________ 102
S SAHR, head restraint _____________ 23
SDM _________________________ 292
R Saab Information Display __________ 93
Saab Parking Assistance _________ 190
SID ___________________________ 93
SPA __________________________ 190
Rain sensor ____________________ 107 Saab Trionic engine management
Raising the soft top manually, system ______________________ 216
Convertible ____________________ 70
Reading lights, Convertible _________ 80
Safety belts _____________________ 12
Seatbelts _______________________ 12
T
Rear fog light __________________ 104 Seatbelts in rear seat, Convertible ___ 77 Technical data __________________ 294
Rear seats, folding down _________ 146 Seatbelts, care _________________ 276 Textile carpeting, cleaning _________ 277
Rear towing eye ________________ 206 Seatbelts, checking ______________ 276 Tie down eyes __________________ 149
Rear window heating ____________ 114 Seats __________________________ 18 Tightening torque, wheels _________ 275
Rearview mirrors ________________ 132 Securing a load _________________ 149 Tire chains _____________________ 263
Recirculation ___________________ 113 Sentronic, manual gear selection ___ 178 Tire date code __________________ 270
Index 317
Tire inspection and rotation _______ 258
Tire markings __________________ 266
U What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ______________________ 43
Tire pressure monitoring, automatic _ 254 Uniform tire quality grading ________ 261 Wheel replacement ______________ 262
Tire sidewall labeling ____________ 264 Upholstery care _________________ 276 Wheels and tires, sizes ___________ 304
Tire sizes _____________________ 304 Upholstery, cleaning _____________ 276 When it is time for new tires _______ 259
Tire terminology and definitions ____ 267 Useful tips on night driving ________ 205 Windshield washers _____________ 106
Tire, changing __________________ 273 Useful tips on starting ____________ 163 Windshield wipers _______________ 106
Tire, spare _____________________ 270 Wing mirrors ___________________ 132
Tires _________________________ 256 Winter driving __________________ 195
Tools and spare wheel ___________ 270
Touching up paintwork ___________ 279
V Winter tires ____________________ 269
Wiper blades ___________________ 230
Towbar _______________________ 198 Vanity mirror ___________________ 142 Wipers ________________________ 106
Towbar load ___________________ 200 Vehicle identification number ______ 307
Towing _______________________ 205 Vehicle recovery ________________ 207
Towing a trailer _________________ 198
Towing the car _________________ 206
Vehicle Data Collection ___________ 292
X
Traction Control System (TCS) _____ 183 Xenon headlights ________________ 233
Transmission oil, checking ________ 222
Transmission oil, grade ___________ 301
W Xenon headlights, head light levelling 102
Transmission, automatic __________ 173 Warning labels ___________________ 8

Transmission, manual ____________ 172 Warning lights ___________________ 84
Transporting the car _____________ 207 Warning triangle ________________ 105
Treadwear indicators ____________ 259 Warnings and messages on SID,
Trip computer ___________________ 94 Convertible ____________________ 73
Trip meter ______________________ 89 Washer fluid ___________________ 230
Troubleshooting, A/C and ACC ____ 282 Washer jets ____________________ 231
Trunk lid, driving when open _______ 204 Washers ______________________ 106
Trunk lid, opening ________________ 53 Washing ______________________ 277
Turbo gauge ____________________ 90 Washing a Convertible ___________ 278
TCS __________________________ 183 Waxing and polishing ____________ 279
Wear indicators, tires ____________ 259
318 Index

Owner's Manual Saab 9-3 M2006

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner's Manual Saab 9-3 M2006

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner's Manual Saab 9-3 M2006

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

93U SM 06.

book Page 1 Friday,February 18,2005 1:15 PM

© Saab Automobile AB 2005

Replacing wiper blades ___ 230

Ashtray _____________________ 144

Exterior Maximum loads _______________ 294 Hood _______________________ 214

Anti-corrosion treatment ___ 280

Brake lights _____________ 240

Folding down the rear seat _ 146

Airbag _________________ 32 Airbag_________________ 32

Fuses _________________ 247

Electric windows _________ 129

Child seats ________________ 24 Ashtray and cigarette lighter _____ 144

Alternator ______________ 229

DANGER/POISON 700 CCA (SAE) DANGER/POISON 700 CCA (SAE)

burns. brûlures graves. ENFANTS

Contact a Saab dealer if a

Battery acid Deactivating

Safety belts ___________ 12

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all

Safety belts Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are

The shoulder strap must be as far in on

Safety belt use during pregnancy

The three rear seats all have three-point

Seats We recommend that adjustments to the

Legroom adjustment Backrest rake angle Lumbar support 3

WARNING The backrest should be upright during

Adjust the rake angle of the backrest with

Storing and restoring settings

The front seats are equipped with Saab

WARNING • Never leave children unattended in a Protect children from getting

Lower anchorages in the rear seat, Sport Sedan and SportCombi

Lower anchorages in the rear seat, Convertible

3 Lower the headrest and route the tether

Inflated airbag (driver’s side). Both front airbags inflated

The driver and passenger front airbags are Note:

Airbag system Accessories and other equipment must

The airbag starts to

• Never place anything on the dash or in

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

Doors Central locking A key code number is supplied with your

*) parking lights, side direction indicators,

Remote control battery

Change the battery as soon as possible to

SportCombi: If you unlock and/or open the

Advice on soft top Rollover Pop-up Bars ___ 78

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

1 Start the engine and let it idle. Clearance

1 Start the engine and let it idle. Clearance

Raising the soft top

Cause Suitable action

Open/close soft top Complete soft top operation.

The front seats are equipped with Saab

For how to secure loads on the rear seat,

Rollover Pop-up Bars • Rollover Pop Up Bars deploy with

Placing two golf bags Spoiler on trunklid 3

Instruments and controls 83

Instruments and controls

Warning and indicator

Exterior Maximum loads _ 294 Hood _________ 214

Airbag _ 32 Airbag_ 32

Child seats ____________ 24 Ashtray and cigarette lighter _ 144